TMS320C5514AZCH10

TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 TMS320C5514 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor Check for Samples: TMS320C5514 1 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor 1.1 Features 12 • High-Performance, Low-Power, TMS320C55x™ Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor – 16.67-, 13.33-, 10-, 8.33-ns Instruction Cycle Time – 60-, 75-, 100-, 120-MHz Clock Rate – One/Two Instructions Executed per Cycle – Dual Multipliers [Up to 200 or 240 Million Multiply-Accumulates per Second (MMACS)] – Two Arithmetic/Logic Units (ALUs) – Three Internal Data/Operand Read Buses and Two Internal Data/Operand Write Buses – Software-Compatible With C55x Devices – Industrial Temperature Devices Available • 256K Bytes Zero-Wait State On-Chip RAM, Composed of: – 64K Bytes of Dual-Access RAM (DARAM), 8 Blocks of 4K x 16-Bit – 192K Bytes of Single-Access RAM (SARAM), 24 Blocks of 4K x 16-Bit • 128K Bytes of Zero Wait-State On-Chip ROM (4 Blocks of 16K x 16-Bit) • 4M x 16-Bit Maximum Addressable External Memory Space (SDRAM/mSDRAM) • 16-/8-Bit External Memory Interface (EMIF) with Glueless Interface to: – 8-/16-Bit NAND Flash, 1- and 4-Bit ECC – 8-/16-Bit NOR Flash – Asynchronous Static RAM (SRAM) – SDRAM/mSDRAM (1.8-, 2.5-, 2.75-, and 3.3-V) • Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller – Four DMA With 4 Channels Each (16Channels Total) • Three 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers – One Selectable as a Watchdog and/or GP • Two MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) Interfaces • Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) • Serial-Port Interface (SPI) With Four ChipSelects • Master/Slave Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C Bus™) • Four Inter-IC Sound (I2S Bus™) for Data Transport • Device USB Port With Integrated 2.0 HighSpeed PHY that Supports: – USB 2.0 Full- and High-Speed Device • Real-Time Clock (RTC) With Crystal Input, With Separate Clock Domain and Power Supply • Four Core Isolated Power Supply Domains: Analog, RTC, CPU and Peripherals, and USB • Four I/O Isolated Power Supply Domains: RTC I/O, EMIF I/O, USB PHY, and DVDDIO • Three integrated LDOs (DSP_LDO, ANA_LDO, and USB_LDO) to power the isolated domains: DSP Core, Analog, and USB Core, respectively • Low-Power S/W Programmable Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) Clock Generator • On-Chip ROM Bootloader (RBL) to Boot From NAND Flash, NOR Flash, SPI EEPROM, SPI Serial Flash or I2C EEPROM • IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-Scan-Compatible • Up to 26 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins (Multiplexed With Other Device Functions) • 196-Terminal Pb-Free Plastic BGA (Ball Grid Array) (ZCH Suffix) • 1.05-V Core (60 or 75 MHz), 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/Os • 1.3-V Core (100, 120 MHz), 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/Os 1 2 Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 1.2 • • • • • • • www.ti.com Applications Wireless Audio Devices (Headsets, Microphones, Speakerphones) Echo Cancellation Headphones Portable Medical Devices Voice Applications Industrial Controls Fingerprint Biometrics Software Defined Radio 1.3 Description The device is a member of TI's TMS320C5000™ fixed-point Digital Signal Processor (DSP) product family and is designed for low-power applications. The fixed-point DSP is based on the TMS320C55x™ DSP generation CPU processor core. The C55x™ DSP architecture achieves high performance and low power through increased parallelism and total focus on power savings. The CPU supports an internal bus structure that is composed of one program bus, one 32-bit data read bus and two 16-bit data read buses, two 16-bit data write buses, and additional buses dedicated to peripheral and DMA activity. These buses provide the ability to perform up to four 16-bit data reads and two 16-bit data writes in a single cycle. The device also includes four DMA controllers, each with 4 channels, providing data movement for 16-independent channel contexts without CPU intervention. Each DMA controller can perform one 32-bit data transfer per cycle, in parallel and independent of the CPU activity. The C55x CPU provides two multiply-accumulate (MAC) units, each capable of 17-bit x 17-bit multiplication and a 32-bit add in a single cycle. A central 40-bit arithmetic/logic unit (ALU) is supported by an additional 16-bit ALU. Use of the ALUs is under instruction set control, providing the ability to optimize parallel activity and power consumption. These resources are managed in the Address Unit (AU) and Data Unit (DU) of the C55x CPU. The C55x CPU supports a variable byte width instruction set for improved code density. The Instruction Unit (IU) performs 32-bit program fetches from internal or external memory and queues instructions for the Program Unit (PU). The Program Unit decodes the instructions, directs tasks to the Address Unit (AU) and Data Unit (DU) resources, and manages the fully protected pipeline. Predictive branching capability avoids pipeline flushes on execution of conditional instructions. Serial media is supported through two MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) peripherals, four Inter-IC Sound (I2S Bus™) modules, one Serial-Port Interface (SPI) with up to 4 chip selects, one I2C multimaster and slave interface, and a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) interface. The device peripheral set includes an external memory interface (EMIF) that provides glueless access to asynchronous memories like EPROM, NOR, NAND, and SRAM, as well as to high-speed, high-density memories such as synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) and mobile SDRAM (mSDRAM). Additional peripherals include: a high-speed Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0) device mode only, and a real-time clock (RTC). This device also includes three general-purpose timers with one configurable as a watchdog timer, and an analog phase-locked loop (APLL) clock generator. Furthermore, the device includes three integrated LDOs (DSP_LDO, ANA_LDO, and USB_LDO) to power different sections of the device. The DSP_LDO can provide 1.3 V or 1.05 V to the DSP core (CVDD), selectable on-the-fly by software as long as operating frequency ranges are observed. To allow for lowest power operation, the programmer can shutdown the internal DSP_LDO cutting power to the DSP core (CVDD) while an external supply provides power to the RTC (CVDDRTC and DVDDRTC). The ANA_LDO is designed to provide 1.3 V to the DSP PLL (VDDA_PLL) and power management circuits (VDDA_ANA). The USB_LDO provides 1.3 V to USB core digital (USB_VDD1P3) and PHY circuits (USB_VDDA1P3). The RTC alarm interrupt or the WAKEUP pin can re-enable the internal DSP_LDO and re-apply power to the DSP core. 2 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 The device is supported by the industry’s award-winning eXpressDSP™, Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE), DSP/BIOS™, Texas Instruments’ algorithm standard, and the industry’s largest third-party network. Code Composer Studio IDE features code generation tools including a C Compiler and Linker, RTDX™, XDS100™, XDS510™, XDS560™ emulation device drivers, and evaluation modules. The device is also supported by the C55x DSP Library which features more than 50 foundational software kernels (FIR filters, IIR filters, and various math functions) as well as chip support libraries. Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 3 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 1.4 www.ti.com Functional Block Diagram Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the device. DSP System JTAG Interface Input Clock(s) C55x™ DSP CPU PLL/Clock Generator 64 KB DARAM Power Management 192 KB SARAM Pin Multiplexing 128 KB ROM Switched Central Resource (SCR) Peripherals Serial Interfaces I2S (x4) I2C SPI Interconnect Connectivity DMA (x4) USB 2.0 PHY (HS) [DEVICE] Program/Data Storage UART NAND, NOR, SRAM, mSDRAM MMC/SD (x2) System RTC GP Timer (x2) GP Timer or WD LDOs Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram 4 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 ............... 1 ............................................. 1 1.2 Applications .......................................... 2 1.3 Description ........................................... 2 1.4 Functional Block Diagram ........................... 4 Revision History .............................................. 6 2 Device Overview ........................................ 7 2.1 Device Characteristics ............................... 7 2.2 C55x CPU ............................................ 9 2.3 Memory Map Summary ............................ 13 2.4 Pin Assignments .................................... 14 2.5 Terminal Functions ................................. 15 3 Device Configuration ................................. 44 3.1 System Registers ................................... 44 3.2 Power Considerations .............................. 45 3.3 Clock Considerations ............................... 48 3.4 Boot Sequence ..................................... 50 3.5 Configurations at Reset ............................ 53 3.6 Configurations After Reset ......................... 54 3.7 Multiplexed Pin Configurations ..................... 57 3.8 Debugging Considerations ......................... 61 4 Device Operating Conditions ....................... 63 1 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor 1.1 5 Features 4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range (Unless Otherwise Noted) .... 63 4.2 4.3 Recommended Operating Conditions .............. 64 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) ........... 65 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications .......................................... 67 5.1 5.2 Parameter Information .............................. 67 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior ............................................ 68 5.3 5.4 Power Supplies ..................................... 68 External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and USB_MXI Pins ...................................... 72 5.5 ......................................... 76 ........... 78 Reset ............................................... 79 Wake-up Events, Interrupts, and XF ............... 83 External Memory Interface (EMIF) ................. 85 Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) ........ 99 Real-Time Clock (RTC) ........................... 104 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ...................... 108 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 6 7 Clock PLLs Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) ............................................ 112 ............................... ......................... 5.16 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 Controller ........ 5.17 General-Purpose Timers .......................... 5.18 General-Purpose Input/Output .................... 5.19 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG ................................ Device and Documentation Support ............. 6.1 Device Support .................................... 6.2 Community Resources ............................ 5.14 Inter-IC Sound (I2S) 114 5.15 Serial Port Interface (SPI) 121 124 131 133 137 139 139 140 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information ............................................ 141 7.1 Thermal Data for ZCH 7.2 Packaging Information ............................ ............................ Contents Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 141 141 5 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Revision History NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version. This data manual revision history highlights the technical changes made to the document. Scope: Applicable updates to the TMS320C5000 device family, specifically relating to the device (Silicon Revisions 2.0) which is now in the production data (PD) stage of development have been incorporated. SEE ADDITIONS/MODIFICATIONS/DELETIONS Global • Section 2 Device Overview Table 2-1, Characteristics of the C5514 Processor: • Deleted Power Characterization • Updated addresses for MMC/SD0 and MMC/SD1 in Table 2-4, Peripheral I/O-Space Control Registers. Section 2.5 Terminal Functions Table 2-7, RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions: • Deleted duplicate note on board design guidelines. Added notes to clarify that CVDDRTC must always be powered by an external power supply and none of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC. Table 2-8, External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions: • Changed note for 16-bit asynchronous memory to connect EM_A[20:0] to memory address pins [21:1]. Table 2-13, USB2.0 Terminal Functions • Added power-on information for USB_VBUS, USB_VDDA3P3, USB_VDDA1P3, and USB_VDD1P3. Table 2-18, Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions: • Updated RSV16 description to tie directly to VSS. Section 3 Device Configuration • Added note stating Device ID registers are reserved. • Updated reset value for WU_DOUT from 0 to 1. Section 3.4, Boot Sequence: • Added steps to set register configuration and copy boot image sections (steps 15 and 16). • Changed Figure 3-2, Bootloader Software Architecture. • Added reset default to pin multiplexing tables. Section 3.7 Multiplexed Pin Configurations Section 3.7.1, Pin Multiplexing Details: • Added MODE 0 column to Table 3-6, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.PPMODE Bits]. Section 4 Device Operating Conditions Section 4.3 • Added note for core (CVDD) supply power (P). • Updated ESD Stress Voltage value for HBM to > 1000 V and CDM to > 250 V. Section 5.3 Power Supplies • Section 5.5.1 PLL Device-Specific Information Table 5-3, PLL Clock Frequency Ranges: • Updated maximum value for PLL_LOCKTIME. Section 5.8.2 Wake-Up From IDLE Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-8, Timing Requirements for Wake-Up From IDLE: • Changed minimum value to 30.5 µs from 10 ns. Updated Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply Sequencing. Table 5-9, Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For Wake-Up From IDLE: • Changed parameter description to, "Delay time, WAKEUP pulse complete to CPU active." • 6 Moved 2 to WAKEUP pulse complete from wake-up event high in Figure 5-14, Wake-Up From IDLE Timings. Section 5.9 External Memory Interface (EMIF) Global: • Updated device limitations on EM_SDCLK when DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V and 1.3 V. • Added notes to timing and switching tables. Section 5.11 Real-Time Clock (RTC) • Section 6 Device and Documentation Support Moved documentation support to Section 7 from Section 3.6 and 3.7. Added to wake-up sequence in Section 5.11.1, RTC Only Mode. Contents Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2 Device Overview 2.1 Device Characteristics Table 2-1, provides an overview of the TMS320C5514 DSP. The tables show significant features of the device, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the CPU frequency, and the package type with pin count. For more detailed information on the actual device part number and maximum device operating frequency, see Section 6.1.2, Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature. Table 2-1. Characteristics of the C5514 Processor HARDWARE FEATURES C5514 Peripherals Asynchronous (8/16-bit bus width) SRAM, Flash (NOR, NAND), SDRAM and Mobile SDRAM (16-bit bus width) (1) External Memory Interface (EMIF) Not all peripheral pins are available at the same time (for more detail, see the DMA Device Configuration section). Four DMA controllers each with four channels, for a total of 16 channels Timers 2 32-Bit General-Purpose (GP) Timers 1 Additional Timer Configurable as a 32-Bit GP Timer and/or a Watchdog UART 1 (with RTS/CTS flow control) SPI 1 with 4 chip selects I2C 1 (Master/Slave) 2 4 (Two Channel, Full Duplex Communication) I S USB 2.0 (Device only) High- and Full-Speed Device 2 MMC/SD, 256 byte read/write buffer, max 50-MHz clock for SD cards, and signaling for DMA transfers MMC/SD Real-Time Clock (RTC) 1 (Crystal Input, Separate Clock Domain and Power Supply) General-Purpose Input/Output Port (GPIO) Up to 26 pins (with 1 Additional General-Purpose Output (XF)) Size (Bytes) On-Chip Memory 256KB RAM, 128KB ROM • • • Organization JTAG BSDL_ID JTAGID Register (Value is: 0x1B8F E02F) CPU Frequency MHz Cycle Time ns Voltage 64KB On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM) 192KB On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM) 128KB On-Chip Single-Access ROM (SAROM) see Figure 5-37 1.05-V Core 60 or 75 MHz 1.3-V Core 100 or 120 MHz 1.05-V Core 16.67, 13.3 ns 1.3-V Core 10, 8.33 ns 1.05 V (60, 75 MHz) Core (V) 1.3 V (100, 120 MHz) I/O (V) LDOs 1.8 V, 2.5 V, 2.75 V, 3.3 V DSP_LDO 1.3 V or 1.05 V, 250 mA max current for DSP CPU (CVDD) ANA_LDO 1.3 V, 4 mA max current for PLL (VDDA_PLL)and power management circuits (VDDA_ANA) USB_LDO 1.3 V, 25 mA max current for USB core digital (USB_VDD1P3) and PHY circuits (USB_VDDA1P3) PLL Options Software Programmable Multiplier BGA Package 10 x 10 mm Process Technology μm (1) x4 to x4099 multiplier 196-Pin BGA (ZCH) 0.09 μm For more information on SDRAM devices support, see Section 5.9, External Memory Interface (EMIF). Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 7 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 2-1. Characteristics of the C5514 Processor (continued) HARDWARE FEATURES Product Status (2) (2) 8 C5514 Product Preview (PP), Advance Information (AI), or Production Data (PD) PD PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.2 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 C55x CPU The TMS320C5514 fixed-point digital signal processor (DSP) is based on the C55x CPU 3.3 generation processor core. The C55x DSP architecture achieves high performance and low power through increased parallelism and total focus on power savings. The CPU supports an internal bus structure that is composed of one program bus, three data read buses (one 32-bit data read bus and two 16-bit data read buses), two 16-bit data write buses, and additional buses dedicated to peripheral and DMA activity. These buses provide the ability to perform up to four data reads and two data writes in a single cycle. Each DMA controller can perform one 32-bit data transfer per cycle, in parallel and independent of the CPU activity. The C55x CPU provides two multiply-accumulate (MAC) units, each capable of 17-bit x 17-bit multiplication in a single cycle. A central 40-bit arithmetic/logic unit (ALU) is supported by an additional 16bit ALU. Use of the ALUs is under instruction set control, providing the ability to optimize parallel activity and power consumption. These resources are managed in the Address Unit (AU) and Data Unit (DU) of the C55x CPU. The C55x DSP generation supports a variable byte width instruction set for improved code density. The Instruction Unit (IU) performs 32-bit program fetches from internal or external memory, stores them in a 128-byte Instruction Buffer Queue, and queues instructions for the Program Unit (PU). The Program Unit decodes the instructions, directs tasks to AU and DU resources, and manages the fully protected pipeline. Predictive branching capability avoids pipeline flushes on execution of conditional instruction calls. For more detailed information on the CPU, see the TMS320C55x CPU 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature number SWPU073). The C55x core of the device can address 16M bytes of unified data and program space. It also addresses 64K words of I/O space and includes three types of on-chip memory: 128 KB read-only memory (ROM), 192 KB single-access random access memory (SARAM), 64 KB dual-access random access memory (DARAM). The memory map is shown in Figure 2-1. 2.2.1 On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM) The DARAM is located in the byte address range 000000h − 00FFFFh and is composed of eight blocks of 4K words each (see Table 2-2). Each DARAM block can perform two accesses per cycle (two reads, two writes, or a read and a write). The DARAM can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses. Table 2-2. DARAM Blocks (1) CPU BYTE ADDRESS RANGE DMA CONTROLLER BYTE ADDRESS RANGE MEMORY BLOCK 000000h – 001FFFh 0001 0000h – 0001 1FFFh DARAM 0 (1) 002000h – 003FFFh 0001 2000h – 0001 3FFFh DARAM 1 004000h – 005FFFh 0001 4000h – 0001 5FFFh DARAM 2 006000h – 007FFFh 0001 6000h – 0001 7FFFh DARAM 3 008000h – 009FFFh 0001 8000h – 0001 9FFFh DARAM 4 00A000h – 00BFFFh 0001 A000h – 0001 BFFFh DARAM 5 00C000h – 00DFFFh 0001 C000h – 0001 DFFFh DARAM 6 00E000h – 00FFFFh 0001 E000h – 0001 FFFFh DARAM 7 The first 192 bytes are reserved for memory-mapped registers (MMRs). See Figure 2-1, Memory Map Summary. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 9 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.2.2 www.ti.com On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM) The SARAM is located at the byte address range 010000h – 03FFFFh and is composed of 24 blocks of 4K words each (see Table 2-3). Each SARAM block can perform one access per cycle (one read or one write). SARAM can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses. SARAM is also accessed by the USB DMA bus. Table 2-3. SARAM Blocks 2.2.3 CPU BYTE ADDRESS RANGE DMA/USB CONTROLLER BYTE ADDRESS RANGE MEMORY BLOCK 010000h − 011FFFh 0009 0000h – 0009 1FFFh SARAM 0 012000h − 013FFFh 0009 2000h – 0009 3FFFh SARAM 1 014000h − 015FFFh 0009 4000h – 0009 5FFFh SARAM 2 016000h − 017FFFh 0009 6000h – 0009 7FFFh SARAM 3 018000h − 019FFFh 0009 8000h – 0009 9FFFh SARAM 4 01A000h − 01BFFFh 0009 A000h – 0009 BFFFh SARAM 5 01C000h − 01DFFFh 0009 C000h – 0009 DFFFh SARAM 6 01E000h − 01FFFFh 0009 E000h – 0009 FFFFh SARAM 7 020000h − 021FFFh 000A 0000h – 000A 1FFFh SARAM 8 022000h − 023FFFh 000A 2000h – 000A 3FFFh SARAM 9 024000h − 025FFFh 000A 4000h – 000A 5FFFh SARAM 10 026000h − 027FFFh 000A 6000h – 000A 7FFFh SARAM 11 028000h − 029FFFh 000A 8000h – 000A 9FFFh SARAM 12 02A000h − 02BFFFh 000A A000h – 000A BFFFh SARAM 13 02C000h − 02DFFFh 000A C000h – 000A DFFFh SARAM 14 02E000h − 02FFFFh 000A E000h – 000A FFFFh SARAM 15 030000h − 031FFFh 000B 0000h – 000B 1FFFh SARAM 16 032000h − 033FFFh 000B 2000h – 000B 3FFFh SARAM 17 034000h − 035FFFh 000B 4000h – 000B 5FFFh SARAM 18 036000h − 037FFFh 000B 6000h – 000B 7FFFh SARAM 19 038000h − 039FFFh 000B 8000h – 000B 9FFFh SARAM 20 03A000h − 03BFFFh 000B A000h – 000B BFFFh SARAM 21 03C000h − 03DFFFh 000B C000h – 000B DFFFh SARAM 22 03E000h − 03FFFFh 000B E000h – 000B FFFFh SARAM 23 040000h – 04FFFFh 000C 0000h – 000C FFFFh Reserved On-Chip Read-Only Memory (ROM) The zero-wait-state ROM is located at the byte address range FE0000h – FFFFFFh. The ROM is composed of four 16K-word blocks, for a total of 128K bytes of ROM. The ROM address space can be mapped by software to the external memory or to the internal ROM. The standard device includes a Bootloader program resident in the ROM. When the MPNMC bit field of the ST3 status register is cleared (by default), the byte address range FE0000h – FFFFFFh is reserved for the on-chip ROM. When the MPNMC bit field of the ST3 status register is set through software, the on-chip ROM is disabled and not present in the memory map, and byte address range FE0000h – FFFFFFh is unmapped. A hardware reset always clears the MPNMC bit, so it is not possible to disable the ROM at reset. However, the software reset instruction does not affect the MPNMC bit. The ROM can be accessed by the program and data buses. Each on-chip ROM block is a one cycle per word access memory. 10 Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.2.4 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 External Memory The external memory space of the device is located at the byte address range 050000h – FFFFFFh. The external memory space is divided into five chip select spaces: one dedicated to SDRAM and mobile SDRAM (EMIF CS0 or CS[1:0] space), and the remainder (EMIF CS2 through CS5 space) dedicated to asynchronous devices including flash. Each chip select space has a corresponding chip select pin (called EM_CSx) that is activated during an access to the chip select space. The external memory interface (EMIF) provides the means for the DSP to access external memories and other devices including: mobile single data rate (SDR) synchronous dynamic RAM (SDRAM and mSDRAM), NOR Flash, NAND Flash, and asynchronous static RAM (SRAM). Before accessing external memory, you must configure the EMIF through its memory-mapped registers. The EMIF provides a configurable 16- or 8-bit data bus, an address bus width of up to 21-bits, and 5 dedicated chip selects, along with memory control signals. To maximize power savings, the I/O pins of the EMIF can be operated at an independent voltage from the other I/O pins on the device. 2.2.5 I/O Memory The device includes a 64K byte I/O space for the memory-mapped registers of the DSP peripherals and system registers used for idle control, status monitoring and system configuration. I/O space is separate from program/memory space and is accessed with separate instruction opcodes or via the DMA's. Table 2-4 lists the memory-mapped registers of the device. Note that not all addresses in the 64K byte I/O space are used; these addresses should be treated as RESERVED and not accessed by the CPU nor DMA. For the expanded tables of each peripheral, see Section 5, Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications of this document. Some of the DMA controllers have access to the I/O-Space memory-mapped registers of the following peripherals registers: I2C, UART, I2S, MMC/SD, EMIF, and USB. Before accessing any peripheral memory-mapped register, make sure the peripheral being accessed is not held in reset via the Peripheral Reset Control Register (PRCR) and its internal clock is enabled via the Peripheral Clock Gating Control Registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2). Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 11 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 2-4. Peripheral I/O-Space Control Registers 12 WORD ADDRESS PERIPHERAL 0x0000 – 0x0004 Idle Control 0x0005 – 0x000D through 0x0803 – 0x0BFF Reserved 0x0C00 – 0x0C7F DMA0 0x0C80 – 0x0CFF Reserved 0x0D00 – 0x0D7F DMA1 0x0D80 – 0x0DFF Reserved 0x0E00 – 0x0E7F DMA2 0x0E80 – 0x0EFF Reserved 0x0F00 – 0x0F7F DMA3 0x0F80 – 0x0FFF Reserved 0x1000 – 0x10DD EMIF 0x10EE – 0x10FF through 0x1300 – 0x17FF Reserved 0x1800 – 0x181F Timer0 0x1820 – 0x183F Reserved 0x1840 – 0x185F Timer1 0x1860 – 0x187F Reserved 0x1880 – 0x189F Timer2 0x1900 – 0x197F RTC 0x1980 – 0x19FF Reserved 0x1A00 – 0x1A6C I2C 0x1A6D – 0x1AFF Reserved 0x1B00 – 0x1B1F UART 0x1B80 – 0x1BFF Reserved 0x1C00 – 0x1CFF System Control 0x1D00 – 0x1FFF through 0x2600 – 0x27FF Reserved 0x2800 – 0x2840 I2S0 0x2900 – 0x2940 I2S1 0x2A00 – 0x2A40 I2S2 0x2B00 – 0x2B40 I2S3 0x2C41 – 0x2FFF Reserved 0x3000 – 0x300F SPI 0x3010 – 0x39FF Reserved 0x3A00 – 0x3A7F MMC/SD0 0x3A80 – 0x3AFF Reserved 0x3B00 – 0x3B7F MMC/SD1 0x3B80 – 0x6FFF Reserved 0x7000 – 0x70FF Analog Control Registers 0x7100 – 0x7FFF Reserved 0x8000 – 0xFFFF USB Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.3 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Memory Map Summary The device provides 16M bytes of total memory space composed of on-chip RAM, on-chip ROM, and external memory space supporting a variety of memory types. The on-chip, dual-access RAM allows two accesses to a given block during the same cycle. There are 8 blocks of 8K bytes of dual-access RAM. The on-chip, single-access RAM allows one access to a given block per cycle. In addition, there are 24 blocks of 8K bytes of single-access RAM. The remainder of the memory map is divided into five external spaces, and on-chip ROM. Each external space has a chip select decode signal (called EM_CS0, EM_CS[2:5]) that indicates an access to the selected space. The external memory interface (EMIF) supports access to asynchronous memories such as SRAM, NAND, or NOR and Flash, and mobile single data rate (mSDR) and single data rate (SDR) SDRAM. The DSP memory is accessible by different master modules within the DSP, including the C55x CPU, the four DMA controllers, and the CDMA of USB (see Figure 2-1). CPU BYTE DMA/USB BYTE ADDRESS(A) ADDRESS(A) 000000h 0001 0000h 0000C0h 0001 00C0h MEMORY BLOCKS MMR (Reserved) DARAM 010000h 0009 0000h 040000h 050000h 000C 0000h 0100 0000h (B) (D) C00000h E00000h F00000h FE0000h 192K Bytes Reserved 64K Bytes FFFFFFh (C)(E) 8M Minus 320K Bytes SDRAM/mSDRAM 0200 0000h External-CS2 Space (C) External-CS3 Space (C) 2M Bytes Asynchronous External-CS4 Space (C) 1M Bytes Asynchronous External-CS5 Space (C) 1M Minus 128K Bytes Asynchronous 4M Bytes Asynchronous 0300 0000h 0400 0000h 0500 0000h 050E 0000h ROM (if MPNMC=0) A. B. C. D. E. 64K Minus 192 Bytes SARAM External-CS0 Space 800000h BLOCK SIZE Reserved (if MPNMC=1) Unmapped (if MPNMC=1) 128K Bytes ROM (if MPNMC=0) 050F FFFFh Address shown represents the first byte address in each block. The first 192 bytes are reserved for memory-mapped registers (MMRs). Reading/Writing to/from unmapped returns zeros. The USB controller does not have access to DARAM. The CS0 space can be accessed by CS0 only or by CS0 and CS1. Figure 2-1. Memory Map Summary Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 13 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.4 www.ti.com Pin Assignments Extensive pin multiplexing is used to accommodate the largest number of peripheral functions in the smallest possible package. Pin multiplexing is controlled using software programmable register settings. For more information on pin muxing, see Section 3.7, Multiplexed Pin Configurations of this document. 2.4.1 Pin Map (Bottom View) Figure 2-2 shows the bottom view of the package pin assignments. P EM_DQM1 DVDDEMIF DVDDIO SPI_CS0 SPI_CS2 SPI_RX GP[12] DVDDIO GP[15] GP[17] I2S2_FS/ GP[19]/ SPI_CS0 I2S2_DX/ GP[27]/ SPI_TX UART_CTS/ GP[29]/ I2S3_FS UART_TXD/ GP[31]/ I2S3_DX N EM_A[15]/ GP[21] EM_SDCKE SPI_CLK SPI_CS1 SPI_CS3 SPI_TX GP[13] GP[14] GP[16] I2S2_CLK/ GP[18]/ SPI_CLK I2S2_RX/ GP[20]/ SPI_RX UART_RTS/ GP[28]/ I2S3_CLK UART_RXD/ GP[30]/ I2S3_RX DVDDIO M EM_A[14] EM_D[5] EM_SDCLK EM_CS3 EMU1 TCK TDO XF TRST MMC0_D1/ I2S0_RX/ GP[3] MMC0_CMD/ I2S0_FS/ GP[1] MMC1_D1/ I2S1_RX/ GP[9] MMC1_CLK/ I2S1_CLK/ GP[6] MMC1_D0/ I2S1_DX/ GP[8] L EM_A[13] EM_A[10] EM_D[12] EM_D[4] CVDD EMU0 TDI TMS MMC0_D0/ I2S0_DX/ GP[2] MMC0_CLK/ I2S0_CLK/ GP[0] MMC0_D3/ GP[5] MMC0_D2/ GP[4] MMC1_D3/ GP[11] MMC1_CMD/ I2S1_FS/ GP[7] K EM_A[12]/ (CLE) EM_A[11]/ (ALE) EM_D[14] EM_D[13] EM_D[6] EM_WAIT3 DVDDIO VSS VSS CVDD VSS DVDDIO VSS MMC1_D2/ GP[10] J EM_A[8] EM_A[9] EM_A[20]/ GP[26] EM_D[15] DVDDEMIF CVDD VSS VSS VSS RSV1 RSV2 USB_VBUS USB_VDD1P3 USB_DM H EM_WE EM_A[7] EM_D[7] EM_WAIT5 DVDDEMIF VSS DVDDEMIF CVDD USB_ VSSA1P3 USB_ VDDA1P3 USB_ VSSA3P3 USB_ VDDA3P3 USB_VSS1P3 USB_DP G EM_WAIT4 EM_A[18]/ GP[24] EM_D[0] EM_A[19]/ GP[25] DVDDEMIF VSS VSS USB_VDDPLL USB_R1 USB_VSSREF USB_VSSPLL USB_VDDOSC USB_MXI USB_MXO F EM_A[6] EM_A[17]/ GP[23] EM_D[2] EM_D[9] DVDDEMIF CVDD DVDDIO DVDDRTC VSS VSS USB_VSSOSC USB_LDOO LDOI LDOI E EM_A[2] EM_A[16]/ GP[22] EM_D[8] EM_OE EM_D[1] DVDDEMIF INT1 WAKEUP VSS DSP_LDOO VSS VSS VSS VSS D EM_A[5] EM_A[3] EM_D[10] EM_D[3] EM_WAIT2 RESET VSS RTC_ CLKOUT VSSA_PLL RSV6 VSS DSP_ LDO_EN RSV16 RSV3 C EM_A[4] EM_A[1] EM_CS4 EM_D[11] EM_CS2 INT0 CLK_SEL CVDDRTC VSSRTC VDDA_PLL RSV9 RSV0 RSV5 RSV4 B EM_BA[1] EM_A[0] EM_CS0 EM_SDCAS EM_DQM0 EM_R/W SCL SDA RTC_XI VSSA_ANA RSV8 LDOI BG_CAP VSSA_ANA A EM_BA[0] DVDDEMIF EM_CS5 EM_CS1 DVDDEMIF EM_SDRAS CLKOUT CLKIN RTC_XO VDDA_ANA RSV7 ANA_LDOO VSS VSS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Figure 2-2. Pin Map 14 Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.5 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Terminal Functions The terminal functions tables (Table 2-5 through Table 2-20) identify the external signal names, the associated pin (ball) numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type, whether the pin has any internal pullup or pulldown resistors or bus-holders, and a functional pin description. For more detailed information on device configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pins, and debugging considerations, see Section 3, Device Configuration. For proper device operation, external pullup/pulldown resistors may be required on some pins. Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors, discusses situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 15 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.5.1 www.ti.com Oscillator and PLL Terminal Functions Table 2-5. Oscillator and PLL Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION DSP clock output signal. For debug purposes, the CLKOUT pin can be used to tap different clocks within the system clock generator. The SRC bits in the CLKOUT Control Source Register (CCSSR) can be used to specify the CLKOUT pin source. Additionally, the slew rate of the CLKOUT pin can be controlled by the Output Slew Rate Control Register (OSRCR) [0x1C16]. CLKOUT A7 O/Z – DVDDIO BH The CLKOUT pin is enabled/disabled through the CLKOFF bit in the CPU ST3_55 register. When disabled, the CLKOUT pin is placed in high-impedance (Hi-Z). At reset the CLKOUT pin is enabled until the beginning of the boot sequence, when the on-chip Bootloader sets CLKOFF = 1 and the CLKOUT pin is disabled (Hi-Z). For more information on the ST3_55 register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073). Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. Input clock. This signal is used to input an external clock when the 32-KHz on-chip oscillator is not used as the DSP clock (pin CLK_SEL = 1). For boot purposes, the CLKIN frequency is assumed to be either 11.2896, 12, or 12.288 MHz. The CLK_SEL pin (C7) selects between the 32-KHz crystal clock or CLKIN. CLKIN A8 I – DVDDIO BH When the CLK_SEL pin is low, this pin should be tied to ground (VSS). When CLK_SEL is high, this pin should be driven by an external clock source. If CLK_SEL is high, this pin is used as the reference clock for the clock generator and during bootup the bootloader bypasses the PLL and assumes the CLKIN frequency is one of the following frequencies: 11.2896-, 12-, or 12.288-MHz. With these frequencies in mind, the bootloader sets the SPI clock rates at 500 KHz and the I2C clock rate at 400 KHz. Clock input select. This pin selects between the 32-KHz crystal clock or CLKIN. CLK_SEL C7 I – DVDDIO BH 0 = 32-KHz on-chip oscillator drives the RTC timer and the system clock generator while CLKIN is ignored. 1 = CLKIN drives the system clock generator and the 32-KHz on-chip oscillator drives only the RTC timer. This pin is not allowed to change during device operation; it must be tied high or low at the board. (1) (2) (3) (4) 16 VDDA_PLL C10 PWR 1.3-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator (PLLOUT ≤ 120 see Section 4.2, MHz). ROC This signal can be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin. VSSA_PLL D9 GND see Section 4.2, Analog PLL ground for the system clock generator. ROC I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.5.2 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 RTC Terminal Functions Table 2-6. Real-Time Clock (RTC) Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION Real-time clock oscillator output. This pin operates at the RTC core voltage, CVDDRTC, and supports a 32.768-kHz crystal. RTC_XO A9 O/Z – CVDDRTC If the RTC oscillator is not used, it can be disabled by connecting RTC_XI to CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to floating or grounded. A voltage must still be applied to CVDDRTC by an external power source (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC. Note: When RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC registers (I/O address range 1900h – 197Fh) are not accessible. Real-time clock oscillator input. RTC_XI B9 I – CVDDRTC If the RTC oscillator is not used, it can be disabled by connecting RTC_XI to CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to ground (VSS). A voltage must still be applied to CVDDRTC by an external power source (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC. Note: When RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC registers (I/O address range 1900h – 197Fh) are not accessible. RTC_CLKOUT D8 O/Z WAKEUP E8 I/O/Z (1) (2) (3) (4) – DVDDRTC – DVDDRTC Real-time clock output pin. This pin operates at DVDDRTC voltage. The RTC_CLKOUT pin is enabled/disabled through the RTCCLKOUTEN bit in the RTC Power Management Register (RTCPMGT). At reset, the RTC_CLKOUT pin is disabled (high-impedance [Hi-Z]). The pin is used to WAKEUP the core from idle condition. This pin defaults to an input at CVDDRTC powerup, but can also be configured as an active-low open-drain output signal to wakeup an external device from an RTC alarm. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 17 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.5.3 www.ti.com RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions Table 2-7. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME NO. TYPE (1) (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION RESET External Flag Output. XF is used for signaling other processors in multiprocessor configurations or XF can be used as a fast generalpurpose output pin. XF M8 O/Z – DVDDIO BH XF is set high by the BSET XF instruction and XF is set low by the BCLR XF instruction or by writing to bit 13 of the ST1_55 register. For more information on the ST1_55 register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073). For XF pin behavior at reset, see Section 5.7.2, Pin Behaviors at Reset. Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not externally pulled low or high. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. XF pin is ONLY in the Hi-Z state when doing boundary scan. Therefore, external termination is probably not required for most applications. RESET D6 I IPU DVDDIO BH Device reset. RESET causes the DSP to terminate execution and loads the program counter with the contents of the reset vector. When RESET is brought to a high level, the reset vector in ROM at FFFF00h forces the program execution to branch to the location of the on-chip ROM bootloader. RESET affects the various registers and status bits. The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register but will be forced ON when RESET is asserted. JTAG [For more detailed information on emulation header design guidelines, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589).] IEEE standard 1149.1 test mode select. This serial control input is clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK. TMS L8 I IPU DVDDIO BH If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the device, TMS must be buffered. In this case, the input buffer for TMS needs a pullup resistor connected to DVDDIO to hold the signal at a known value when the emulator is not connected. A resistor value of 4.7 kΩ or greater is suggested. For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589). The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. (1) (2) (3) (4) 18 I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-7. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME NO. TYPE (1) (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION IEEE standard 1149.1 test data output. The contents of the selected register (instruction or data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of TCK. TDO is in the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state except when the scanning of data is in progress. TDO M7 O/Z – DVDDIO BH For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589). If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the device, TDO must be buffered. Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. TDO pin will be Hi-Z whenever not doing emulation/boundary scan, so an external pullup is highly recommended. IEEE standard 1149.1 test data input. TDI is clocked into the selected register (instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK. TDI L7 I IPU DVDDIO BH If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the device, TDI must be buffered. In this case, the input buffer for TDI needs a pullup resistor connected to DVDDIO to hold this signal at a known value when the emulator is not connected. A resistor value of 4.7 kΩ or greater is suggested. The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. IEEE standard 1149.1 test clock. TCK is normally a free-running clock signal with a 50% duty cycle. The changes on input signals TMS and TDI are clocked into the TAP controller, instruction register, or selected test data register on the rising edge of TCK. Changes at the TAP output signal (TDO) occur on the falling edge of TCK. TCK M6 I IPU DVDDIO BH If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the device, TCK must be buffered. For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589). The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. TRST M9 I IPD DVDDIO BH IEEE standard 1149.1 reset signal for test and emulation logic. TRST, when high, allows the IEEE standard 1149.1 scan and emulation logic to take control of the operations of the device. If TRST is not connected or is driven low, the device operates in its functional mode, and the IEEE standard 1149.1 signals are ignored. The device will not operate properly if this reset pin is never asserted low. For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589). It is recommended that an external pulldown resistor be used in addition to the IPD -- especially if there is a long trace to an emulation header. Emulator 1 pin. EMU1 is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as input/output by way of the emulation logic. EMU1 M5 I/O/Z IPU DVDDIO BH An external pullup to DVDDIO is required to provide a signal rise time of less than 10 μsec. A 4.7-kΩ resistor is suggested for most applications. For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589). The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 19 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 2-7. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME EMU0 NO. L6 TYPE (1) I/O/Z (2) OTHER (3) IPU DVDDIO BH (4) DESCRIPTION Emulator 0 pin. When TRST is driven low and then high, the state of the EMU0 pin is latched and used to connect the JTAG pins (TCK, TMS, TDI, TDO) to either the IEEE1149.1 Boundary-Scan TAP (when the latched value of EMU0 = 0) or to the DSP Emulation TAP (when the latched value of EMU0 = 1). Once TRST is high, EMU0 is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as input/output by way of the emulation logic. An external pullup to DVDDIO is required to provide a signal rise time of less than 10 μsec. A 4.7-kΩ resistor is suggested for most applications. For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference (literature number: SPRU589). The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS 20 INT1 E7 I IPU DVDDIO BH INT0 C6 I IPU DVDDIO BH External interrupt inputs (INT1 and INT0). These pins are maskable via their specific Interrupt Mask Register (IMR1, IMR0) and the interrupt mode bit. The pins can be polled and reset by their specific Interrupt Flag Register (IFR1, IFR0). The IPU resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.5.4 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 EMIF Terminal Functions Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION EMIF FUNCTIONAL PINS: ASYNC (NOR, SRAM, and NAND) Note: When accessing 8-bit Asynchronous memory: • Connect EM_A[20:0] to memory address pins [22:2] • Connect EM_BA[1:0] to memory address pins [1:0] For 16-bit Asynchronous memory: • Connect EM_A[20:0] to memory address pins [21:1] • Connect EM_BA[1] to memory address pin [0] EM_A[20]/GP[26] J3 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF external address pin 20. Mux control via the A20_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-3). The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. EM_A[19]/GP[25] G4 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF external address pin 19. Mux control via the A19_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-3). The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. EM_A[18]/GP[24] G2 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF external address pin 18. Mux control via the A18_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-3). The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. EM_A[17]/GP[23] F2 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF external address pin 17. Mux control via the A17_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-3). The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. EM_A[16]/GP[22] E2 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF external address pin 16. Mux control via the A16_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-3). The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. EM_A[15]/GP[21] N1 This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF external address pin 15. I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 14. Mux control via the A15_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 3-3). The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. EM_A[14] M1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_A[13] L1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 13. EM_A[12]/(CLE) K1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 12. When interfacing with NAND Flash, this pin also acts as Command Latch Enable (CLE). EM_A[11]/(ALE) K2 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 11. When interfacing with NAND Flash, this pin also acts as Address Latch Enable (ALE). EM_A[10] L2 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 10. (1) (2) (3) (4) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 21 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION NO. EM_A[9] J2 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 9. EM_A[8] J1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 8. EM_A[7] H2 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 7. EM_A[6] F1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 6. EM_A[5] D1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 5. EM_A[4] C1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 4. EM_A[3] D2 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 3. EM_A[2] E1 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 2. EM_A[1] C2 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 1. EM_A[0] B2 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH This pin is the EMIF external address pin 0. EM_D[15] J4 EM_D[14] K3 EM_D[13] K4 I/O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EMIF 16-bit bi-directional bus. O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_D[12] L3 EM_D[11] C4 EM_D[10] D3 EM_D[9] F4 EM_D[8] E3 EM_D[7] H3 EM_D[6] K5 EM_D[5] M2 EM_D[4] L4 EM_D[3] D4 EM_D[2] F3 EM_D[1] E5 EM_D[0] G3 EM_CS5 EM_CS4 EM_CS3 22 TYPE (1) NAME A3 C3 M4 O/Z O/Z DVDDEMIF BH DVDDEMIF BH EMIF chip select 5 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash, NAND flash, or SRAM). Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF chip select 4 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash, NAND flash, or SRAM). Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF NAND chip select 3 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash, NAND flash, or SRAM). Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME EM_CS2 TYPE (1) NO. C5 (2) O/Z OTHER (3) (4) DVDDEMIF BH DESCRIPTION EMIF NAND chip select 2 output for use with asynchronous memories (i.e., NOR flash, NAND flash, or SRAM). Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF asynchronous memory write enable output EM_WE H1 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_OE E4 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_R/W B6 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_DQM1 P1 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_DQM0 B5 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH Note: These pins may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pins. EM_BA[1] B1 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EMIF asynchronous bank address Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF asynchronous memory read enable output Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF asynchronous read/write output Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF asynchronous data write strobes and byte enables or EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM data mask bits. 16-bit wide memory: EM_BA[1] forms the device address[0] and BA[0] forms device address [23]. EM_BA[0] A1 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH 8-bit wide memory: EM_BA[1] forms the device address[1] and BA[0] forms device address [0]. EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM bank address. Note: These pins may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pins. EMIF wait state extension input 5 for EM_CS5 EM_WAIT5 H4 I DVDDEMIF BH EM_WAIT4 G1 I DVDDEMIF BH EM_WAIT3 K6 I DVDDEMIF BH EM_WAIT2 D5 I DVDDEMIF BH Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF wait state extension input 4 for EM_CS4 Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF wait state extension input 3 for EM_CS3 Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF wait state extension input 2 for EM_CS2 Note: This pin may consume static power through the input buffer if not externally driven. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 23 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 2-8. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION EMIF FUNCTIONAL PINS: SDRAM and mSDRAM ONLY EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM chip select 1 output EM_CS1 A4 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_CS0 B3 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_SDCLK M3 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_SDCKE N2 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_SDRAS A6 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH EM_SDCAS B4 O/Z DVDDEMIF BH Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM chip select 0 output Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM clock Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM clock enable Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM row address strobe Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM column strobe 24 Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.5.5 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 I2C Terminal Functions Table 2-9. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION I2C (1) (2) (3) (4) SCL B7 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH SDA B8 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH This pin is the I2C clock output. Per the I2C standard, an external pullup is required on this pin. This pin is the I2C bidirectional data signal. Per the I2C standard, an external pullup is required on this pin. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 25 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.5.6 www.ti.com I2S0 – I2S3 Terminal Functions Table 2-10. Inter-IC Sound (I2S0 – I2S3) Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION Interface 0 (I2S0) This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_D0/ I2S0_DX/ GP[2] L9 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S0 transmit data output I2S0_DX. Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_CLK/ I2S0_CLK/ GP[0] L10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S0 clock input/output I2S0_CLK. Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_D1/ I2S0_RX/ GP[3] M10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S0 receive data input I2S0_RX. Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_CMD/ I2S0_FS/ GP[1] M11 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S0 frame synchronization input/output I2S0_FS. Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. Interface 1 (I2S1) This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO. MMC1_D0/ I2S1_DX/ GP[8] M14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S1 transmit data output I2S1_DX. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO. MMC1_CLK/ I2S1_CLK/ GP[6] M13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S1 clock input/output I2S1_CLK. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO. MMC1_D1/ I2S1_RX/ GP[9] M12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S1 receive data input I2S1_RX. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S2, and GPIO. MMC1_CMD/ I2S1_FS/ GP[7] (1) (2) (3) (4) 26 L14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S1 frame synchronization input/output I2S1_FS. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-10. Inter-IC Sound (I2S0 – I2S3) Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION Interface 2 (I2S2) This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_DX/ GP[27]/ SPI_TX P12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S2 transmit data output I2S2_DX. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_CLK/ GP[18]/ SPI_CLK N10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S2 clock input/output I2S2_CLK. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_RX/ GP[20]/ SPI_RX N11 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S2 receive data input I2S2_RX. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2 and GPIO. I2S2_FS/ GP[19]/ SPI_CS0 P11 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S2 frame synchronization input/output I2S2_FS. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Interface 3 (I2S3) This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_TXD/ GP[31]/ I2S3_DX P14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S3 transmit data output I2S3_DX. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_RTS/ GP[28]/ I2S3_CLK N12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S3 clock input/output I2S3_CLK. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_RXD/ GP[30]/ I2S3_RX N13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S3 receive data input I2S3_RX. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_CTS/ GP[29]/ I2S3_FS P13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For I2S, it is I2S3 frame synchronization input/output I2S3_FS. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 27 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.5.7 www.ti.com SPI Terminal Functions Table 2-11. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION Serial Port Interface (SPI) SPI_CS0 P4 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS0. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_FS/ GP[19]/ SPI_CS0 P11 Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS0. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. SPI_CS1 N4 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH SPI_CS2 P5 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS2. SPI_CS3 N5 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS3. For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS1. For SPI, this pin is clock output SPI_CLK. SPI_CLK N3 O/Z DVDDIO BH Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not pulled high or low. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. This pin is ONLY in the Hi-Z state when doing boundary scan. Therefore, external termination is probably not required for most applications. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_CLK/ GP[18]/ SPI_CLK N10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. For SPI, this pin is clock output SPI_CLK. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. SPI_TX N6 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH For SPI, this pin is SPI transmit data output. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_DX/ GP[27]/ SPI_TX P12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. For SPI, this pin is SPI transmit data output. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. SPI_RX P6 I/O/Z DVDDIO BH For SPI this pin is SPI receive data input. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_RX/ GP[20]/ SPI_RX N11 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. For SPI this pin is SPI receive data input. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. (1) (2) (3) (4) 28 I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 2.5.8 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 UART Terminal Functions Table 2-12. UART Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION UART This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_RXD/ GP[30]/ I2S3_RX N13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH When used by UART, it is the receive data input UART_RXD. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_TXD/ GP[31]/ I2S3_DX P14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH In UART mode, it is the transmit data output UART_TXD. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_CTS/ GP[29]/ I2S3_FS P13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH In UART mode, it is the clear to send input UART_CTS. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_RTS/ GP[28]/ I2S3_CLK (1) (2) (3) (4) N12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH In UART mode, it is the ready to send output UART_RTS. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 29 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.5.9 www.ti.com USB 2.0 Terminal Functions Table 2-13. USB2.0 Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION USB 2.0 12-MHz crystal oscillator input. When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_MXI should be connected to ground (VSS). USB_MXI G13 I USB_VDDOSC When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is connected to board ground (VSS). 12-MHz crystal oscillator output. When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_MXO should be left unconnected. USB_MXO G14 O/Z USB_VDDOSC USB_VDDOSC G12 S see Section 4.2, ROC When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is connected to board ground (VSS). 3.3-V power supply for USB oscillator. When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_VDDOSC should be connected to ground (VSS). Ground for USB oscillator. When using a 12-MHz crystal, this pin is a local ground for the crystal and must not be connected to the board ground (See Figure 5-7). USB_VSSOSC F11 S see Section 4.2, ROC A I/O see Section 4.2, ROC When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is connected to board ground (VSS). USB power detect. 5-V input that signifies that VBUS is connected. USB_VBUS J12 This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply Sequencing. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VBUS signal should be connected to ground (VSS). USB_DP H14 A I/O USB_VDDA3P3 USB bi-directional Data Differential signal pair [positive/negative]. USB_DM J14 A I/O USB_VDDA3P3 When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_DP and USB_DM signals should both be tied to ground (VSS). USB_R1 G9 A I/O USB_VDDA3P3 External resistor connect. Reference current output. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to USB_VSSREF and be placed as close to the device as possible. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_R1 signal should be connected via a 10-kΩ resistor to USB_VSSREF. USB_VSSREF (1) (2) (3) (4) 30 G10 GND see Section 4.2, ROC Ground for reference current. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to USB_R1. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSREF signal should be connected directly to ground (Vss). I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-13. USB2.0 Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION Analog 3.3 V power supply for USB PHY. USB_VDDA3P3 H12 S see Section 4.2, ROC This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply Sequencing. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA3P3 signal should be connected to ground (VSS). USB_VSSA3P3 H11 GND see Section 4.2, ROC S see Section 4.2, ROC Analog ground for USB PHY. Analog 1.3 V power supply for USB PHY. [For high-speed sensitive analog circuits] USB_VDDA1P3 H10 This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply Sequencing. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA1P3 signal should be connected to ground (VSS). USB_VSSA1P3 H9 GND see Section 4.2, ROC S see Section 4.2, ROC Analog ground for USB PHY [For high speed sensitive analog circuits]. 1.3-V digital core power supply for USB PHY. USB_VDD1P3 J13 This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.3.1, Power-Supply Sequencing. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDD1P3 signal should be connected to ground (VSS). USB_VSS1P3 H13 GND see Section 4.2, ROC USB_VDDPLL G8 S see Section 4.2, ROC USB_VSSPLL G11 GND see Section 4.2, ROC Digital core ground for USB phy. 3.3 V USB Analog PLL power supply. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDPLL signal should be connected to ground (VSS). USB Analog PLL ground. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 31 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 2.5.10 MMC/SD Terminal Functions Table 2-14. MMC1/SD Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION MMC/SD This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO. MMC1_CLK/ I2S1_CLK/ GP[6] M13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For MMC/SD, this is the MMC1 data clock output MMC1_CLK. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO. MMC1_CMD/ I2S1_FS/ GP[7] L14 MMC1_D3/ GP[11] L13 MMC1_D2/ GP[10] K14 MMC1_D1/ I2S1_RX/ GP[9] MMC1_D0/ I2S1_DX/ GP[8] (1) (2) (3) (4) 32 M12 M14 I/O/Z I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH IPD DVDDIO BH For MMC/SD, this is the MMC1 command I/O output MMC1_CMD. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. The MMC1_D3 and MMC1_D2 pins are multiplexed between MMC1 and GPIO. I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH The MMC1_D1 and MMC1_D0 pins are multiplexed between MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO. I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH In MMC/SD mode, all these pins are the MMC1 nibble wide bi-directional data bus. The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-15. MMC0/SD Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION MMC/SD This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_CLK/ I2S0_CLK/ GP[0] L10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For MMC/SD, this is the MMC0 data clock output MMC0_CLK. Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_CMD/ I2S0_FS/ GP[1] M11 MMC0_D3/ GP[5] L11 MMC0_D2/ GP[4] L12 MMC0_D1/ I2S0_RX/ GP[3] MMC0_D0/ I2S0_DX/ GP[2] (1) (2) (3) (4) M10 L9 I/O/Z I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH IPD DVDDIO BH For MMC/SD, this is the MMC0 command I/O output MMC0_CMD. Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. The MMC0_D3 and MMC0_D2 pins are multiplexed between MMC0 and GPIO. I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH The MMC0_D1 and MMC0_D0 pins are multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH In MMC/SD mode, these pins are the MMC0 nibble wide bi-directional data bus. The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 33 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 2.5.11 GPIO Terminal Functions Table 2-16. GPIO Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION General-Purpose Input/Output External Flag Output. XF is used for signaling other processors in multiprocessor configurations or XF can be used as a fast general-purpose output pin. XF M8 O/Z – DVDDIO BH XF is set high by the BSET XF instruction and XF is set low by the BCLR XF instruction or by writing to bit 13 of the ST1_55 register. For more information on the ST1_55 register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073). For XF pin behavior at reset, see Section 5.7.2, Pin Behaviors at Reset. Note: This pin may consume static power if configured as Hi-Z and not externally pulled low or high. Prevent current drain by externally terminating the pin. XF pin is ONLY in the Hi-Z state when doing boundary scan. Therefore, external termination is probably not required for most applications. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_CLK/ I2S0_CLK/ GP[0] L10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 0 (GP[0]). Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_CMD/ I2S0_FS/ GP[1] M11 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 1 (GP[1]). Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_D0/ I2S0_DX/ GP[2] L9 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 2 (GP[2]). Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO. MMC0_D1/ I2S0_RX/ GP[3] M10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 3 (GP[3]). Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0 and GPIO. MMC0_D2/ GP[4] L12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 4 (GP[4]). Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between MMC0 and GPIO. MMC0_D3/ GP[5] I2S1_CLK/ GP[6] (1) (2) (3) (4) 34 L11 M13 I/O/Z I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 5 (GP[5]). Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S1 and GPIO. For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 6 (GP[6]). Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-16. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION This pin is multiplexed between I2S1 and GPIO. I2S1_FS/ GP[7] L14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 7 (GP[7]). Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S1 and GPIO. I2S1_DX/ GP[8] M14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 8 (GP[8]). Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S1 and GPIO. IPD DVDDIO BH I2S1_RX/ GP[9] M12 K14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 10 (GP[10]). GP[10] L13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 11 (GP[11]). GP[11] P7 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 12 (GP[12]). GP[12] N7 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 13 (GP[13]). GP[13] N8 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 14 (GP[14]). GP[14] P9 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 15 (GP[15]). GP[15] N9 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 16 (GP[16]). GP[16] P10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 17 (GP[17]). GP[17] I2S2_CLK/ GP[18]/ SPI_CLK I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 18 (GP[18]). N10 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH I/O/Z For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 9 (GP[9]). Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR1 register. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2 and GPIO. I2S2_FS/ GP[19]/ SPI_CS0 P11 For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 19 (GP[19]). Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 35 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 2-16. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO and SPI. I2S2_RX/ GP[20]/ SPI_RX N11 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 20 (GP[20]). Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. EM_A[15]/GP[21] N1 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]). Mux control via the A15_MODE bit in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. EM_A[16]/GP[22] E2 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]). Mux control via the A16_MODE bit in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. EM_A[17]/GP[23] F2 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]). Mux control via the A17_MODE bit in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. EM_A[18]/GP[24] G2 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]). Mux control via the A18_MODE bit in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. EM_A[19]/GP[25] G4 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]). Mux control via the A19_MODE bit in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. EM_A[20]/GP[26] J3 I/O/Z IPD DVDDEMIF BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]). Mux control via the A20_MODE bit in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR2 register. This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, GPIO, and SPI. I2S2_DX/ GP[27]/ SPI_TX P12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 27 (GP[27]). Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_RTS/ GP[28]/ I2S3_CLK N12 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 28 (GP[28]). Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_CTS/ GP[29]/ I2S3_FS P13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 29 (GP[29]). Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_RXD/ GP[30]/ I2S3_RX 36 N13 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 30 (GP[30]). Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-16. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION This pin is multiplexed between UART, GPIO, and I2S3. UART_TXD/ GP[31]/ I2S3_DX P14 I/O/Z IPD DVDDIO BH For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 31 (GP[31]). Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR. The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PDINHIBR3 register. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 37 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 2.5.12 Regulators and Power Management Terminal Functions Table 2-17. Regulators and Power Management Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION Regulators DSP_LDOO E10 S DSP_LDO output. When enabled, this output provides a regulated 1.3 V or 1.05 V output and up to 250 mA of current (see the ISD parameter in Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature). The DSP_LDO is intended to supply current to the digital core circuits only (CVDD) and not external devices. For proper device operation, the external decoupling capacitor of this pin should be 5µF ~ 10µF. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.4, Power-Supply Decoupling. When disabled, this pin is in the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state. LDOI F14, F13, B12 S LDO inputs. For proper device operation, LDOI must always be powered. The LDOI pins must be connected to the same power supply source with a voltage range of 1.8 V to 3.6 V. These pins supply power to the internal LDOs, the bandgap reference generator circuits, and serve as the I/O supply for some input pins. DSP_LDO enable input. This signal is not intended to be dynamically switched. 0 = DSP_LDO is enabled. The internal POR monitors the DSP_LDOO pin voltage and generates the internal POWERGOOD signal. DSP_LDO_EN USB_LDOO D12 F12 I S – LDOI 1 = DSP_LDO is disabled. The internal POR voltage monitoring is also disabled. The internal POWERGOOD signal is forced high and the external reset signal on the RESET pin (D6) is the only source of the device reset. Note, the device's internal reset signal is generated as the logical AND of the RESET pin and the internal POWERGOOD signal. USB_LDO output. This output provides a regulated 1.3 V output and up to 25 mA of current (see the ISD parameter in Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature). For proper device operation, this pin must be connected to a 1 μF ~ 2 μF decoupling capacitor to VSS. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.4, Power-Supply Decoupling. This LDO is intended to supply power to the USB_ VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3 pins and not external devices. ANA_LDO output. This output provides a regulated 1.3 V output and up to 4 mA of current (see the ISD parameter in Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature). ANA_LDOO A12 S For proper device operation, this pin must be connected to an ~ 1.0 μF decoupling capacitor to VSS. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.4, Power-Supply Decoupling. This LDO is intended to supply power to the VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL pins and not external devices. Bandgap reference filter signal. For proper device operation, this pin needs to be bypassed with a 0.1 μF capacitor to analog ground (VSSA_ANA). BG_CAP (1) (2) (3) (4) 38 B13 A, I/O This external capacitor provides filtering for stable reference voltages & currents generated by the bandgap circuit. The bandgap produces the references for use by the System PLL and POR circuits. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 2.5.13 Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions Table 2-18. Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION Reserved RSV0 C12 I RSV1 J10 PWR RSV2 J11 PWR (3) (4) Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS. Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to CVDD. Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to CVDD. RSV3 D14 I – LDOI RSV4 C14 I – LDOI Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS. RSV5 C13 I – LDOI Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS. RSV6 D10 I/O VDDA_ANA Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground). RSV7 A11 I/O VDDA_ANA Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground). RSV8 B11 I/O VDDA_ANA Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground). RSV9 C11 I/O VDDA_ANA Reserved. (Leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground). I – LDOI RSV16 (1) (2) – LDOI D13 Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS. Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be directly tied to VSS. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 39 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 2.5.14 Supply Voltage Terminal Functions Table 2-19. Supply Voltage Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION SUPPLY VOLTAGES F6 H8 CVDD J6 1.05-V Digital Core supply voltage (60 or 75 MHz) PWR 1.3-V Digital Core supply voltage (100 or 120 MHz) K10 L5 F7 K7 DVDDIO K12 N14 PWR 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/O power supply for non-EMIF and non-RTC I/Os The DVDDIO must always be powered for proper operation. PWR 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V EMIF I/O power supply Note: When EMIF is not used, it is permissable to ground the DVDDEMIF supply pins if the following conditions are all met: • At least one DVDDEMIF package ball (A2, A5, E6, F5, G5, H5, H7, J5, P2) is grounded. The others must be either floating or grounded. • All signal pins that use DVDDEMIF as their I/O supply voltage (i.e., all pins listed in Table 2-8, External Memory Interface Terminal Functions), regardless of multiplexing options, are either: – all grounded – all floating (not driven by any external source), or – any combination of grounded or floating. P3 P8 A2 A5 E6 F5 DVDDEMIF G5 H5 H7 J5 P2 1.05-V thru 1.3-V RTC digital core and RTC oscillator power supply. CVDDRTC (1) (2) (3) (4) 40 C8 PWR DVDDRTC F8 PWR VDDA_PLL C10 PWR Note: The CVDDRTC must always be powered by an external power source even though RTC is not used. CVDDRTC cannot be powered by any of the on-chip LDOs. 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/O power supply for RTC_CLOCKOUT and WAKEUP pins. Note: The DVDDRTC can be tied to ground (VSS) when the RTC_CLKOUT and WAKEUP pins are not permanently used. In this case, the WAKEUP pin must be configured as output by software (see Table 5-24, RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions). see Section 4.2, ROC 1.3-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator (PLLOUT ≤ 120 MHz). This signal can be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin. G8 S see Section 4.2, ROC 3.3 V USB Analog PLL power supply. USB_VDDPLL J13 S see Section 4.2, ROC 1.3-V digital core power supply for USB PHY. USB_VDD1P3 When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDPLL signal should be connected to ground (VSS). When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDD1P3 signal should be connected to ground (VSS). I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-19. Supply Voltage Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL TYPE (1) (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION NAME NO. H10 S see Section 4.2, ROC Analog 1.3 V power supply for USB PHY. [For high-speed sensitive analog circuits] USB_VDDA1P3 H12 S see Section 4.2, ROC Analog 3.3 V power supply for USB PHY. USB_VDDA3P3 G12 S see Section 4.2, ROC 3.3-V power supply for USB oscillator. USB_VDDOSC VDDA_ANA A10 PWR When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA1P3 signal should be connected to ground (VSS). When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA3P3 signal should be connected to ground (VSS). When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_VDDOSC should be connected to ground (VSS). 1.3-V supply for power management This signal can be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin. Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 41 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 2.5.15 Ground Terminal Functions Table 2-20. Ground Terminal Functions SIGNAL NAME TYPE (1) NO. (2) OTHER (3) (4) DESCRIPTION A13 A14 D7 D11 E9 E11 E12 E13 E14 F9 VSS F10 GND Ground pins Ground for RTC oscillator. When using a 32.768-KHz crystal, this pin is a local ground for the crystal and must not be connected to the board ground (See Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5). When not using RTC and the crystal is not populated on the board, this pin is connected to the board ground. G6 G7 H6 J7 J8 J9 K8 K9 K11 K13 (1) (2) (3) (4) 42 VSSRTC C9 GND VSSA_PLL D9 GND see Section 4.2, ROC Analog PLL ground for the system clock generator. USB_VSSPLL G11 GND see Section 4.2, ROC USB Analog PLL ground. USB_VSS1P3 H13 GND see Section 4.2, ROC Digital core ground for USB phy. USB_VSSA1P3 H9 GND see Section 4.2, ROC Analog ground for USB PHY [For high speed sensitive analog circuits]. USB_VSSA3P3 H11 GND see Section 4.2, ROC Analog ground for USB PHY. USB_VSSOSC F11 S see Section 4.2, ROC Ground for USB oscillator. I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or high-impedance state, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IOsupply current. Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD/IPU, if applicable. IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup/pulldown resistors and situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 2-20. Ground Terminal Functions (continued) SIGNAL NAME USB_VSSREF VSSA_ANA TYPE (1) NO. G10 B10 B14 (2) GND OTHER (3) (4) see Section 4.2, ROC GND DESCRIPTION Ground for reference current. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to USB_R1. When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSREF signal should be connected directly to ground (Vss). Ground pins for power management Device Overview Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 43 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 3 Device Configuration 3.1 System Registers The system registers in Table 3-1 configure the device and monitor its status. Table 3-1. Idle Control, Status, and System Registers CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM Register Description 0001h ICR Idle Control Register 0002h ISTR Idle Status Register 1C00h EBSR External Bus Selection Register 1C02h PCGCR1 Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register 1 1C03h PCGCR2 Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register 2 1C04h PSRCR Peripheral Software Reset Counter Register 1C05h PRCR Peripheral Reset Control Register 1C14h TIAFR Timer Interrupt Aggregation Flag Register 1C16h ODSCR 1C17h PDINHIBR1 Pull-Down Inhibit Register 1 1C18h PDINHIBR2 Pull-Down Inhibit Register 2 1C19h PDINHIBR3 Pull-Down Inhibit Register 3 1C1Ah DMA0CESR1 DMA0 Channel Event Source Register 1 1C1Bh DMA0CESR2 DMA0 Channel Event Source Register 2 1C1Ch DMA1CESR1 DMA1 Channel Event Source Register 1 1C1Dh DMA1CESR2 DMA1 Channel Event Source Register 2 1C26h ECDR 1C28h RAMSLPMDCNTLR1 DARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 1 1C2Ah RAMSLPMDCNTLR2 SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 2 see Section 3.6.1. Output Drive Strength Control Register EMIF Clock Divider Register 1C2Bh RAMSLPMDCNTLR3 SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 3 1C2Ch RAMSLPMDCNTLR4 SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 4 1C2Dh RAMSLPMDCNTLR5 SARAM Sleep Mode Control Register 5 1C30h DMAIFR DMA Interrupt Flag Aggregation Register 1C31h DMAIER DMA Interrupt Enable Register 1C32h USBSCR USB System Control Register 1C33h ESCR EMIF System Control Register 1C36h DMA2CESR1 DMA2 Channel Event Source Register 1 1C37h DMA2CESR2 DMA2 Channel Event Source Register 2 1C38h DMA3CESR1 DMA3 Channel Event Source Register 1 DMA3 Channel Event Source Register 2 1C39h DMA3CESR2 1C3Ah CLKSTOP Peripheral Clock Stop Request/Acknowledge Register 1C40h DIEIDR0 (1) Die ID Register 0 1C41h DIEIDR1 (1) Die ID Register 1 1C42h DIEIDR2 (1) Die ID Register 2 1C43h DIEIDR3 (1) Die ID Register 3 1C44h DIEIDR4 (1) Die ID Register 4 1C45h DIEIDR5 (1) Die ID Register 5 1C46h DIEIDR6 (1) Die ID Register 6 1C47h DIEIDR7 (1) Die ID Register 7 7004h LDOCNTL LDO Control Register (1) This register is reserved. 44 Device Configuration COMMENTS see Figure 3-1. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 3.2 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Power Considerations The device provides several means of managing power consumption. To • • • • • • • • • 3.2.1 minimize power consumption, the device divides its circuits into nine main isolated supply domains: LDOI (LDOs and Bandgap Power Supply) Analog POR and PLL (VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL) RTC Core (CVDDRTC) — Note: CVDDRTC must always be powered by an external power source and none of the on-chip LDOs can be used to power CVDDRTC. Digital Core (CVDD) USB Core (USB_ VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3) USB PHY and USB PLL (USB_VDDOSC, USB_VDDA3P3, and USB_VDDPLL) EMIF I/O (DVDDEMIF) RTC I/O (DVDDRTC) Rest of the I/O (DVDDIO) LDO Configuration The device includes three Low-Dropout Regulators (LDOs) which can be used to regulate the power supplies of the analog PLL and Power Management (ANA_LDO), Digital Core (DSP_LDO), and USB Core (USB_LDO). These LDOs are controlled by a combination of pin configuration and register settings. For more detailed information see the following sections. 3.2.1.1 LDO Inputs The LDOI pins (B12, F13, F14) provide power to the internal Analog LDO, DSP LDO, USB LDO, the bandgap reference generator, and some I/O input pins, and can range from 1.8 V to 3.6 V. The bandgap provides accurate voltage and current references to the POR, LDOs, PLL; therefore, for proper device operation, power must always be applied to the LDOI pins even if the LDO outputs are not used. 3.2.1.2 LDO Outputs The ANA_LDOO pin (A12) is the output of the internal ANA_LDO and can provide regulated 1.3 V power of up to 4 mA. The ANA_LDOO pin is intended to be connected, on the board, to the VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL pins to provide a regulated 1.3 V to the Power Management Circuits and System PLL. VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL may be powered by this LDO output, which is recommended, to take advantage of the device's power management techniques, or by an external power supply.. The ANA_LDO cannot be disabled individually (see Section 3.2.1.3, LDO Control). The DSP_LDOO pin (E10) is the output of the internal DSP_LDO and provides software-selectable regulated 1.3 V or regulated 1.05 V power of up to 250 mA. The DSP_LDOO pin is intended to be connected, on the board, to the CVDD pins. In this configuration, the DSP_LDO_EN pin should be tied to the board VSS, thus enabling the DSP_LDO. Optionally, the CVDD pins may be powered by an external power supply; in this configuration the DSP_LDO_EN pin should be tied (high) to LDOI, disabling DSP_LDO. The DSP_LDO_EN also affects how reset is generated to the chip (for more details, see the DSP_LDO_EN pin description in Table 2-17, Regulators and Power Management Terminal Functions). When the DSP_LDO is disabled, its output pin is in a high-impedance state. Note: DSP_LDO_EN is not intended to be changed dynamically. The USB_LDOO pin (F12) is the output of the internal USB_LDO and provides regulated 1.3 V, softwareswitchable (on/off) power of up to 25 mA. The USB_LDOO pin is intended to be connected, on the board, to the USB_VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3 pins to provide power to portions of the USB. Optionally, the USB_VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3 may be powered by an external power supply and the USB_LDO can be left disabled. When the USB_LDO is disabled, its output pin is in a high-impedance state. Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 45 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.2.1.3 www.ti.com LDO Control All three LDOs can be simultaneously disabled via software by writing to either the BG_PD bit or the LDO_PD bit in the RTCPMGT register (see Figure 5-26). When the LDOs are disabled via this mechanism, the only way to re-enable them is by asserting the WAKEUP signal pin (which must also have been previously enabled to allow wakeup), or by a previously enabled and configured RTC alarm, or by cycling power to the CVDDRTC pin. Note: CVDDRTC must be externally powered. None of the on-chip LDOs can be used to power CVDDRTC. ANA_LDO: The ANA_LDO is only disabled by the BG_PD and the LDO_PD mechanism described above. Otherwise, it is always enabled. DSP_LDO: The DSP_LDO can be statically disabled by the DSP_LDO_EN pin as described in Section 3.2.1.2, LDO Outputs. It can be also dynamically disabled via the BG_PD and the LDO_PD mechanism described above. The DSP_LDO can change its output voltage dynamically by software via the DSP_LDO_V bit in the LDOCNTL register (see Figure 3-1). The DSP_LDO output voltage is set to 1.3 V at reset. USB_LDO: The USB_LDO can be independently and dynamically enabled or disabled by software via the USB_LDO_EN bit in the LDOCNTL register (see Figure 3-1). The USB _LDO is disabled at reset. Table 3-3 shows the ON/OFF control of each LDO and its register control bit configurations. 46 Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Figure 3-1. LDO Control Register (LDOCNTL) [7004h] 15 8 Reserved R-0 7 2 Reserved 1 0 DSP_LDO_V USB_LDO_EN R-0 LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset Table 3-2. LDOCNTL Register Bit Descriptions BIT NAME 15:2 RESERVED Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect. DESCRIPTION 1 DSP_LDO_V DSP_LDO voltage select bit. 0 = DSP_LDOO is regulated to 1.3 V. 1 = DSP_LDOO is regulated to 1.05 V. 0 USB_LDO_EN USB_LDO enable bit. 0 = USB_LDO output is disabled. USB_LDOO pin is placed in high-impedance (Hi-Z) state. 1 = USB_LDO output is enabled. USB_LDOO is regulated to 1.3 V. Table 3-3. LDO Controls Matrix RTCPMGT Register (0x1930) LDOCNTL Register (0x7004) DSP_LDO_EN (Pin D12) ANA_LDO DSP_LDO USB_LDO BG_PD Bit LDO_PD Bit USB_LDO_EN Bit 1 Don't Care Don't Care Don't Care OFF OFF OFF Don't Care 1 Don't Care Don't Care OFF OFF OFF 0 0 0 Low ON ON OFF 0 0 0 High ON OFF OFF 0 0 1 Low ON ON ON Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 47 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.3 www.ti.com Clock Considerations The system clock, which is used by the CPU and most of the DSP peripherals, is controlled by the system clock generator. The system clock generator features a software-programmable PLL multiplier and several dividers. The clock generator accepts an input reference clock from the CLKIN pin or the output clock of the 32.768-KHz real-time clock (RTC) oscillator. The selection of the input reference clock is based on the state of the CLK_SEL pin. The CLK_SEL pin is required to be statically tied high or low and cannot change dynamically after reset. In addition, the DSP requires a reference clock for USB applications. The USB reference clock is generated using a dedicated on-chip oscillator with a 12-MHz external crystal connected to the USB_MXI and USB_MXO pins. The USB reference clock is not required if the USB peripheral is not being used. To completely disable the USB oscillator, connect the USB_MXI pin to ground (VSS) and leave the USB_MXO pin unconnected. The USB oscillator power pins (USB_VDDOSC and USB_VSSOSC) should also be connected to ground. The RTC oscillator generates a clock when a 32.768-KHz crystal is connected to the RTC_XI and RTC_XO pins. The 32.768-KHz crystal can be disabled if CLKIN is used as the clock source for the DSP. However, when the RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC peripheral will not operate and the RTC registers (I/O address range 1900h – 197Fh) will not be accessible. This includes the RTC power management register (RTCPMGT) which controls the RTCLKOUT and WAKEUP pins. To disable the RTC oscillator, connect the RTC_XI pin to CVDDRTC and the RTC_XO pin to ground. For more information on crystal specifications for the RTC oscillator and the USB oscillator, see Section 5.4, External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and USB_MXI Pins. 3.3.1 Clock Configurations After Device Reset After reset, the on-chip Bootloader programs the system clock generator based on the input clock selected via the CLK_SEL pin. If CLK_SEL = 0, the Bootloader programs the system clock generator and sets the system clock to 12.288 MHz (multiply the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator clock by 375). If CLK_SEL = 1, the Bootloader bypasses the system clock generator altogether and the system clock is driven by the CLKIN pin. In this case, the CLKIN frequency is expected to be 11.2896 MHz, 12.0 MHz, or 12.288 MHz. While the bootloader tries to boot from the USB, the clock generator will be programmed to output approximately 36 MHz. 3.3.1.1 Device Clock Frequency After the boot process is complete, the user is allowed to re-program the system clock generator to bring the device up to the desired clock frequency and the desired peripheral clock state (clock gating or not). The user must adhere to various clock requirements when programming the system clock generator. For more information, see Section 5.5, Clock PLLs. Note: The on-chip Bootloader allows for DSP registers to be configured during the boot process. However, this feature must not be used to change the output frequency of the system clock generator during the boot process. Timer0 is also used by the bootloader to allow for 200 ms of BG_CAP settling time. The bootloader register modification feature must not modify the Timer0 registers. 48 Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 3.3.1.2 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Peripheral Clock State The clock and reset state of each of peripheral is controlled through a set of system registers. The peripheral clock gating control registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) are used to enable and disable peripheral clocks. The peripheral software reset counter register (PSRCR) and the peripheral reset control register (PRCR) are used to assert and de-assert peripheral reset signals. At hardware reset, all of the peripheral clocks are off to conserve power. After hardware reset, the DSP boots via the bootloader code in ROM. During the boot process, the bootloader queries each peripheral to determine if it can boot from that peripheral. In other words, it reads each peripheral looking for a valid boot image file. At that time, the individual peripheral clocks will be enabled for the query and then disabled again when the bootloader is finished with the peripheral. By the time the bootloader releases control to the user code, all peripheral clocks will be off and all domains in the ICR, except the CPU domain, will be idled. 3.3.1.3 USB Oscillator Control The USB oscillator is controlled through the USB system control register (USBSCR). To enable the oscillator, the USBOSCDIS and USBOSCBIASDIS bits must be cleared to 0. The user must wait until the USB oscillator stabilizes before proceeding with the USB configuration. The USB oscillator stabilization time is typically 100 μs, with a 10 ms maximum (Note: the startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and capacitive load on the crystal). Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 49 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.4 www.ti.com Boot Sequence The boot sequence is a process by which the device's on-chip memory is loaded with program and data sections from an external image file (in flash memory, for example). The boot sequence also allows, optionally, for some of the device's internal registers to be programmed with predetermined values. The boot sequence is started automatically after each device reset. For more details on device reset, see Section 5.7, Reset. There are several methods by which the memory and register initialization can take place. Each of these methods is referred to as a boot mode. At reset, the device cycles through different boot modes until an image is found with a valid boot signature. The on-chip Bootloader allows the DSP registers to be configured during the boot process, if the optional register configuration section is present in the boot image (see Figure 3-2). For more information on the boot modes supported, see Section 3.4.1, Boot Modes. The device Bootloader follows the following steps as shown in Figure 3-2 1. Immediately after reset, the CPU fetches the reset vector from 0xFFFF00. MP/MC is 0 by default, so 0xFFFF00 is mapped to internal ROM. The PLL is in bypass mode. 2. Set CLKOUT slew rate control to slow slew rate. 3. Idle all peripherals, MPORT and HWA. 4. If CLK_SEL = 0, the Bootloader powers up the PLL and sets its output frequency to 12.288 MHz (with a 375x multiplier using VP = 749, VS = 0, input divider disabled, output divide-by-8 enabled, and output divider enabled with VO = 0). If CLK_SEL = 1, the Bootloader keeps the PLL bypassed. 5. Apply manufacturing trim to the bandgap references. 6. Disable CLKOUT. 7. Test for NOR boot on all asynchronous CS spaces (EM_CS[2:5]) with 16-bit access: (a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot signature. (b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 8. (c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image. (d) Attempt NOR boot, go to step 17. 8. Test for NAND boot on all asynchronous CS spaces (EM_CS[2:5]) with 8-bit access: (a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match. (b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 9. (c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image. (d) Attempt NAND boot, go to step 17. 9. Test for 16-bit and 24-bit SPI EEPROM boot on SPI_CS[0] with 500-KHz clock rate and for Parallel Port Mode on External bus Selection Register set to 5, then set to 6: (a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match using 16-bit address mode. (b) If the boot signature is not valid, read the first 2 bytes again using 24-bit address mode. (c) If the boot signature is not valid from either case (16-bit and 24-bit address modes), go to step 10. (d) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image. (e) Attempt SPI Serial Memory boot, go to step 17. 10. Test for I2C EEPROM boot with a 7-bit slave address 0x50 and 400-kHz clock rate. (a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match. (b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 11. (c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image. (d) Attempt I2C EEPROM boot, go to step 17. 11. Test for MMC/SD boot — For more information on MMC/SD boot, contact your local sales representative. 12. Set the PLL output to approximately 36 MHz. If CLK_SEL = 1, CLKIN multiplied by 3x, ; if CLK_SEL = 0, CLKIN is multiplied by 1125x. 13. Test for USB boot — For more information on USB boot, contact your local sales representative. 50 Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. If the boot signature is not valid, then go back to step 14 and repeat. Set register configuration. Copy boot image sections to system memory. Enable TIMER0 to start counting 200 ms. Ensure a minimum of 200 ms has elapsed since step 17 before proceeding to execute the bootloaded code. 19. Jump to the entry point specified in the boot image. CLK SEL = 1 ? No Setup PLL to x375 Yes Internal Configuration NOR Boot ? Yes No NAND Boot ? Yes No SPI Boot ? Yes No Set Register Configuration I2C Boot ? Yes Copy Boot Image Sections to System Memory No MMC/SD0 Boot ? Yes Start Timer0 to Count 200 ms No USB Boot ? No Yes Has Timer0 Counter Expired ? No Yes Jump to Stored Execution Point Figure 3-2. Bootloader Software Architecture Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 51 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.4.1 www.ti.com Boot Modes The device DSP supports the following boot modes in the following device order: NOR Flash, NAND Flash, SPI 16-bit EEPROM, SPI 24-bit Flash, I2C EEPROM, and MMC/SD card. The boot mode is determined by checking for a valid boot signature on each supported boot device. The first boot device with a valid boot signature will be used to load and execute the user code. If none of the supported boot devices have a valid boot signature, the Bootloader goes into an endless loop checking the USB boot mode and the device must be reset to look for another valid boot image in the supported boot modes. Note: For detailed information on MMC/SD and USB boot modes, contact your local sales representative. 3.4.2 Boot Configuration After reset, the on-chip Bootloader programs the system clock generator based on the input clock selected via the CLK_SEL pin. If CLK_SEL = 0, the Bootloader programs the system clock generator and sets the system clock to 12.288 MHz (multiply the 32.768-KHz RTC oscillator clock by 375). If CLK_SEL = 1, the Bootloader bypasses the system clock generator altogether and the system clock is driven by the CLKIN pin. Note: • When CLK_SEL =1, the CLKIN frequency is expected to be 11.2896 MHz, 12.0 MHz, or 12.288 MHz. • The on-chip Bootloader allows for DSP registers to be configured during the boot process. However, this feature must not be used to change the output frequency of the system clock generator during the boot process. Timer0 is also used by the bootloader to allow for 200 ms of BG_CAP settling time. The bootloader register modification feature must not modify the Timer0 registers. After hardware reset, the DSP boots via the bootloader code in ROM. During the boot process, the bootloader queries each peripheral to determine if it can boot from that peripheral. At that time, the individual peripheral clocks will be enabled for the query and then disabled when the bootloader is finished with the peripheral. By the time the bootloader releases control to the user code, all peripheral clocks will be "off" and all domains in the ICR, except the CPU domain, will be idled. 52 Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 3.5 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Configurations at Reset Some device configurations are determined at reset. The following subsections give more details. 3.5.1 Device and Peripheral Configurations at Device Reset Table 3-4 summarizes the device boot and configuration pins that are required to be statically tied high, tied low, or left unconnected during device operation. For proper device operation, a device reset should be initiated after changing any of these pin functions. Table 3-4. Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration Pins CONFIGURATION PINS SIGNAL NO. IPU/IPD FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION DSP_LDO_EN D12 – DSP_LDO enable input. This signal is not intended to be dynamically switched. 0 = DSP_LDO is enabled. The internal DSP LDO is enabled to regulate power on the DSP_LDOO pin at either 1.3 V or 1.05 V according to the LDO_DSP_V bit in the LDOCNTL register, see Figure 3-1). At power-on-reset, the internal POR monitors the DSP_LDOO pin voltage and generates the internal POWERGOOD signal when the DSP_LDO voltage is above a minimum threshold voltage. The internal device reset is generated by the AND of POWERGOOD and the RESET pin. 1 = DSP_LDO is disabled and the DSP_LDOO pin is in high-impedance (Hi-Z). The internal voltage monitoring on the DSP_LDOO is bypassed and the internal POWERGOOD signal is immediately set high. The RESET pin (D6) will act as the sole reset source for the device. If an external power supply is used to provide power to CVDD, then DSP_LDO_EN should be tied to LDOI, DSP_LDOO should be left unconnected, and the RESET pin must be asserted appropriately for device initialization after powerup. Note: to pullup this pin, connect it to the same supply as LDOI pins. CLK_SEL C7 – Clock input select. 0 = 32-KHz on-chip oscillator drives the RTC timer and the system clock generator. CLKIN is ignored. 1 = CLKIN drives the system clock generator and the 32-KHz on-chip oscillator drives only the RTC timer. This pin is not allowed to change during device operation; it must be tied to DVDDIO or GND at the board. For proper device operation, external pullup/pulldown resistors may be required on these device configuration pins. For discussion on situations where external pullup/pulldown resistors are required, see Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors. This device also has RESERVED pins that need to be configured correctly for proper device operation (statically tied high, tied low, or left unconnected at all times). For more details on these pins, see Table 218, Reserved and No Connects Terminal Functions. Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 53 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.6 www.ti.com Configurations After Reset The following sections provide details on configuring the device after reset. Multiplexed pin functions are selected by software after reset. For more details on multiplexed pin function control, see Section 3.7, Multiplexed Pin Configurations. 3.6.1 External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) The External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) determines the mapping of the I2S2, I2S3, UART, SPI, and GPIO signals to 21 signals of the external parallel port pins. It also determines the mapping of the I2S or MMC/SD ports to serial port 1 pins and serial port 2 pins. The EBSR register is located at port address 0x1C00. Once the bit fields of this register are changed, the routing of the signals takes place on the next CPU clock cycle. Additionally, the EBSR controls the function of the upper bits of the EMIF address bus. Pins EM_A[20:15]/GP[26:21] can be individually configured as GPIO pins through the Axx_MODE bits. When Axx_MODE = 1, the EM_A[xx] pin functions as a GPIO pin. When Axx_MODE = 0, the EM_A[xx] pin retains its EMIF functionality. Before modifying the values of the external bus selection register, you must clock gate all affected peripherals through the Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register. After the external bus selection register has been modified, you must reset the peripherals before using them through the Peripheral Software Reset Counter Register. Figure 3-3. External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) [1C00h] 15 14 12 11 10 9 8 Reserved PPMODE SP1MODE SP0MODE R-0 R/W-000 R/W-00 R/W-00 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Reserved A20_MODE A19_MODE A18_MODE A17_MODE A16_MODE A15_MODE R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset Table 3-5. EBSR Register Bit Descriptions BIT NAME 15 RESERVED 14:12 54 PPMODE DESCRIPTION Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect. Parallel Port Mode Control Bits. These bits control the pin multiplexing of the SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] pins on the parallel port. For more details, see Table 3-6, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] Pin Multiplexing. 000 = Mode 0 001 = Mode 1 (SPI, GPIO, UART, and I2S2). 7 signals of the SPI module, 6 GPIO signals, 4 signals of the UART module and 4 signals of the I2S2 module are routed to the 21 external signals of the parallel port. 010 = Mode 2 (GPIO). 8 GPIO are routed to the 21 external signals of the parallel port. 011 = Mode 3 (SPI and I2S3). 4 signals of the SPI module and 4 signals of the I2S3 module are routed to the 21 external signals of the parallel port. 100 = Mode 4 ( I2S2 and UART). 4 signals of the I2S2 module and 4 signals of the UART module are routed to the 21 external signals of the parallel port. 101 = Mode 5 (SPI and UART). 4 signals of the SPI module and 4 signals of the UART module are routed to the 21 external signals of the parallel port. 110 = Mode 6 (SPI, I2S2, I2S3, and GPIO). 7 signals of the SPI module, 4 signals of the I2S2 module, 4 signals of the I2S3 module, and 6 GPIO are routed to the 21 external signals of the parallel port. 111 = Reserved. Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 3-5. EBSR Register Bit Descriptions (continued) BIT NAME DESCRIPTION SP1MODE Serial Port 1 Mode Control Bits. The bits control the pin multiplexing of the I2S1 and GPIO pins on serial port 1. For more details, see Table 3-7, MMC1, I2S1 , and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing. 00 = Mode 0 01 = Mode 1 (I2S1 and GP[11:10]). 4 signals of the I2S1 module and 2 GP[11:10] signals are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial port 1. 10 = Mode 2 (GP[11:6]). 6 GPIO signals (GP[11:6]) are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial port 1. 11 = Reserved. 9:8 SP0MODE Serial Port 0 Mode Control Bits. The bits control the pin multiplexing of the MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO pins on serial port 0. For more details, see Section 3.7.1.3, MMC0, I2S0, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing. 00 = Mode 0 (MMC/SD0). All 6 signals of the MMC/SD0 module are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial port 0. 01 = Mode 1 (I2S0 and GP[5:0]). 4 signals of the I2S0 module and 2 GP[5:4] signals are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial port 0. 10 = Mode 2 (GP[5:0]). 6 GPIO signals (GP[5:0]) are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial port 0. 11 = Reserved. 7 RESERVED Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect. 6 RESERVED Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect. 5 A20_MODE A20 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 20 (EM_A[20]) and general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]) pin functions. 0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 20 (EM_A[20]). 1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]). 4 A19_MODE A19 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 19 (EM_A[19]) and general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]) pin functions. 0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 19 (EM_A[19]). 1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]). 3 A18_MODE A18 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 18 (EM_A[18]) and general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]) pin functions. 0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 18 (EM_A[18]). 1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]). A17_MODE A17 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 17 (EM_A[17]) and general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 3-8, EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing. 0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 17 (EM_A[17]). 1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]). A16_MODE A16 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 16 (EM_A[16]) and general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 3-8, EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing. 0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 16 (EM_A[16]). 1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]). A15_MODE A15 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 15 (EM_A[15]) and general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 3-8, EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing. 0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 15 (EM_A[15]). 1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]). 11:10 2 1 0 3.6.2 LDO Control Register [7004h] When the DSP_LDO is enabled by the DSP_LDO_EN pin [D12], by default, the DSP_LDOO voltage is set to 1.3 V. The DSP_LDOO voltage can be programmed to be either 1.05 V or 1.3 V via the DSP_LDO_V bit (bit 1) in the LDO Control Register (LDOCNTL). At reset, the USB_LDO is turned off. The USB_LDO can be enabled via the USBLDOEN bit (bit 0) in the LDOCNTL register. For more detailed information on the LDOs, see Section 3.2.1 LDO Configuration. Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 55 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.6.3 www.ti.com EMIF and USB System Control Registers (ESCR and USBSCR) [1C33h and 1C32h] After reset, by default, the CPU performs 16-bit accesses to the EMIF and USB registers and data space. To perform 8-bit accesses to the EMIF data space, the user must set the BYTEMODE bits to 01b for the "high byte" or 10b for the "low byte" in the EMIF System Control Register (ESCR). Similarly, the BYTEMODE bits in the USB System Control Register (USBSCR) must also be configured for byte access. 3.6.4 Peripheral Clock Gating Control Registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) [1C02h and 1C03h] After hardware reset, the DSP executes the on-chip bootloader from ROM. As the bootloader executes, it selectively enables the clock of the peripheral being queried for a valid boot. If a valid boot source is not found, the bootloader disables the clock to that peripheral and moves on to the next peripheral in the boot order. After the boot process is complete, all of the peripheral clocks will be off and all domains in the ICR, except for the CPU domain, will be idled (this includes the MPORT and HWA). The user must enable the clocks to the peripherals and CPU ports that are going to be used. The peripheral clock gating control registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) are used to enable and disable the peripheral clocks. 3.6.5 Pullup/Pulldown Inhibit Registers (PDINHIBR1/2/3) [1C17h, 1C18h, and 1C19h, respectively] Each internal pullup and pulldown (IPU/IPD) resistor on the device DSP, except for the IPD on TRST, can be individually controlled through the IPU/IPD registers (PDINHIBR1 [1C17h] , PDINHIBR2 [1C18h], and PDINHIBR3 [1C19h]). To minimize power consumption, internal pullup or pulldown resistors should be disabled in the presence of an external pullup or pulldown resistor or external driver. Section 3.8.1, Pullup/Pulldown Resistors, describes other situations in which an pullup and pulldown resistors are required. When CVDD is powered down, pullup and pulldown resistors will be forced disabled and an internal busholder will be enabled. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.2, Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down. 3.6.6 Output Slew Rate Control Register (OSRCR) [1C16h] To provide the lowest power consumption setting, the DSP has configurable slew rate control on the EMIF and CLKOUT output pins. The output slew rate control register (OSRCR) is used to set a subset of the device I/O pins, namely CLKOUT and EMIF pins, to either fast or slow slew rate. The slew rate feature is implemented by staging/delaying turn-on times of the parallel p-channel drive transistors and parallel nchannel drive transistors of the output buffer. In the slow slew rate configuration, the delay is longer, but ultimately the same number of parallel transistors are used to drive the output high or low. Thus, the drive strength is ultimately the same. The slower slew rate control can be used for power savings and has the greatest effect at lower DVDDIO and DVDDEMIF voltages. 56 Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 3.7 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Multiplexed Pin Configurations The device DSP uses pin multiplexing to accommodate a larger number of peripheral functions in the smallest possible package, providing the ultimate flexibility for end applications. The external bus selection register (EBSR) controls all the pin multiplexing functions on the device. 3.7.1 Pin Multiplexing Details This section discusses how to program the external bus selection register (EBSR) to select the desired peripheral functions and pin muxing. See the individual pin mux sections for pin muxing details for a specific muxed pin. After changing any of the pin mux control registers, it will be necessary to reset the peripherals that are affected. 3.7.1.1 SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.PPMODE Bits] The SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the PPMODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see Table 3-6. Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 57 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 3-6. SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:18] Pin Multiplexing EBSR PPMODE BITS (2) PDINHIBR3 REGISTER BIT FIELDS (1) (1) (2) 58 MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 6 000 (Reset Default) 001 010 011 100 101 110 SPI_CLK – SPI_CLK – – – – SPI_CLK SPI_RX – SPI_RX – – – – SPI_RX PIN NAME SPI_TX – SPI_TX – – – – SPI_TX P2PD GP[12] – GP[12] – – – – GP[12] P3PD GP[13] – GP[13] – – – – GP[13] P4PD GP[14] – GP[14] – – – – GP[14] P5PD GP[15] – GP[15] – – – – GP[15] P6PD GP[16] – GP[16] – – – – GP[16] P7PD GP[17] – GP[17] – – – – GP[17] P8PD I2S2_CLK/GP[18]/SPI_CLK – I2S2_CLK GP[18] SPI_CLK I2S2_CLK SPI_CLK I2S2_CLK P9PD I2S2_FS/GP[19]/SPI_CS0 – I2S2_FS GP[19] SPI_CS0 I2S2_FS SPI_CS0 I2S2_FS P10PD I2S2_RX/GP[20]/SPI_RX – I2S2_RX GP[20] SPI_RX I2S2_RX SPI_RX I2S2_RX P11PD I2S2_DX/GP[27]/SPI_TX – I2S2_DX GP[27] SPI_TX I2S2_DX SPI_TX I2S2_DX P12PD UART_RTS/GP[28]/I2S3_CLK – UART_RTS GP[28] I2S3_CLK UART_RTS UART_RTS I2S3_CLK P13PD UART_CTS/GP[29]/I2S3_FS – UART_CTS GP[29] I2S3_FS UART_CTS UART_CTS I2S3_FS P14PD UART_RXD/GP[30]/I2S3_RX – UART_RXD GP[30] I2S3_RX UART_RXD UART_RXD I2S3_RX P15PD UART_TXD/GP[31]/I2S3_DX – UART_TXD GP[31] I2S3_DX UART_TXD UART_TXD I2S3_DX SPI_CS0 – SPI_CS0 – – – – SPI_CS0 SPI_CS1 – SPI_CS1 – – – – SPI_CS1 SPI_CS2 – SPI_CS2 – – – – SPI_CS2 SPI_CS3 – SPI_CS3 – – – – SPI_CS3 The pin names with PDINHIBR3 register bit field references can have the pulldown resistor enabled or disabled via this register. MODE 0 is the default mode at reset [PMODE bits in the EBSR register] and is not supported on the device. The PMODE bits must be configured to a valid mode (Mode 1 through Mode 6). Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 3.7.1.2 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 MMC1, I2S1, and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.SP1MODE Bits] The MMC1, I2S1, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the SP1MODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see Table 3-7. Table 3-7. MMC1, I2S1, and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing EBSR SP1MODE BITS PDINHIBR1 REGISTER BIT FIELDS (1) (1) PIN NAME MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 00 (Reset Default) 01 10 S10PD MMC1_CLK/I2S1_CLK/GP[6] MMC1_CLK I2S1_CLK GP[6] S11PD MMC1_CMD/I2S1_FS/GP[7] MMC1_CMD I2S1_FS GP[7] S12PD MMC1_D0/I2S1_DX/GP[8] MMC1_D0 I2S1_DX GP[8] S13PD MMC1_D1/I2S1_RX/GP[9] MMC1_D1 I2S1_RX GP[9] S14PD MMC1_D2/GP[10] MMC1_D2 GP[10] GP[10] S15PD MMC1_D3/GP[11] MMC1_D3 GP[11] GP[11] The pin names with PDINHIBR1 register bit field references can have the pulldown register enabled or disabled via this register. Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 59 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.7.1.3 www.ti.com MMC0, I2S0, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.SP0MODE Bits] The MMC0, I2S0, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the SP0MODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see Table 3-8. Table 3-8. MMC0, I2S0, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing EBSR SP0MODE BITS PDINHIBR1 REGISTER BIT FIELDS (1) (1) PIN NAME MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 00 (Reset Default) 01 10 S00PD MMC0_CLK/I2S0_CLK/GP[0] MMC0_CLK I2S0_CLK GP[0] S01PD MMC0_CMD/I2S0_FS/GP[1] MMC0_CMD I2S0_FS GP[1] S02PD MMC0_D0/I2S0_DX/GP[2] MMC0_D0 I2S0_DX GP[2] S03PD MMC0_D1/I2S0_RX/GP[3] MMC0_D1 I2S0_RX GP[3] S04PD MMC0_D2/GP[4] MMC0_D2 GP[4] GP[4] S05PD MMC0_D3/GP[5] MMC0_D3 GP[5] GP[5] The pin names with PDINHIBR1 register bit field references can have the pulldown register enabled or disabled via this register. 3.7.1.4 EMIF EM_A[20:15] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.Axx_MODE bits] The EMIF Address and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the A20_MODE, A19_MODE, A18_MODE, A17_MODE, A16_MODE, and A15_MODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see Table 3-9. Table 3-9. EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing PIN NAME Axx_MODE BIT 0 1 EM_A[15]/GP[21] EM_A[15] GP[21] EM_A[16]/GP[22] EM_A[16] GP[22] EM_A[17]/GP[23] EM_A[17] GP[23] EM_A[18]/GP[24] EM_A[18] GP[24] EM_A[19]/GP[25] EM_A[19] GP[25] EM_A[20]/GP[26] EM_A[20] GP[26] 60 Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 3.8 3.8.1 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Debugging Considerations Pullup/Pulldown Resistors Proper board design should ensure that input pins to the device DSP always be at a valid logic level and not floating. This may be achieved via pullup/pulldown resistors. The DSP features internal pullup (IPU) and internal pulldown (IPD) resistors on many pins, including all GPIO pins, to eliminate the need, unless otherwise noted, for external pullup/pulldown resistors. An external pullup/pulldown resistor may need to be used in the following situations: • Configuration Pins: An external pullup/pulldown resistor is recommended to set the desired value/state (see the configuration pins listed in Table 3-4, Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration Pins). Note that some configuration pins must be connected directly to ground or to a specific supply voltage. • Other Input Pins: If the IPU/IPD does not match the desired value/state, use an external pullup/pulldown resistor to pull the signal to the opposite rail. For the configuration pins (listed in Table 3-4, Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration Pins), if they are both routed out and in a high-impedance state (not driven), it is strongly recommended that an external pullup/pulldown resistor be implemented. In addition, applying external pullup/pulldown resistors on the configuration pins adds convenience to the user in debugging and flexibility in switching operating modes. When an external pullup or pulldown resistor is used on a pin, the pin’s internal pullup or pulldown resistor should be disabled through the Pullup/Pulldown Inhibit Registers (PDINHIBR1/2/3) [1C17h, 1C18h, and 1C19h, respectively] to minimize power consumption. Tips for choosing an external pullup/pulldown resistor: • Consider the total amount of current that may pass through the pullup or pulldown resistor. Make sure to include the leakage currents of all the devices connected to the net, as well as any internal pullup or pulldown (IPU/IPD) resistors. • Decide a target value for the net. For a pulldown resistor, this should be below the lowest VIL level of all inputs connected to the net. For a pullup resistor, this should be above the highest VIH level of all inputs on the net. A reasonable choice would be to target the VOL or VOH levels for the logic family of the limiting device; which, by definition, have margin to the VIL and VIH levels. • Select a pullup/pulldown resistor with the largest possible value; but, which can still ensure that the net will reach the target pulled value when maximum current from all devices on the net is flowing through the resistor. The current to be considered includes leakage current plus, any other internal and external pullup/pulldown resistors on the net. • For bidirectional nets, there is an additional consideration which sets a lower limit on the resistance value of the external resistor. Verify that the resistance is small enough that the weakest output buffer can drive the net to the opposite logic level (including margin). • Remember to include tolerances when selecting the resistor value. • For pullup resistors, also remember to include tolerances on the DVDD rail. For most systems, a 1-kΩ resistor can be used to oppose the IPU/IPD while meeting the above criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific application. For most systems, a 20-kΩ resistor can be used to compliment the IPU/IPD on the configuration pins while meeting the above criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific application. For more detailed information on input current (II), and the low-/high-level input voltages (VIL and VIH) for the device DSP, see Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature. For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the peripheral/system-specific terminal functions table in Section 2.5. Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 61 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 3.8.2 www.ti.com Bus Holders The device has special I/O bus-holder structures to ensure pins are not left floating when CVDD power is removed while I/O power is applied. When CVDD is "ON", the bus-holders are disabled and the internal pullups or pulldowns, if applicable, function normally. But when CVDD is "OFF" and the I/O supply is "ON", the bus-holders become enabled and any applicable internal pullups and pulldowns are disabled. The bus-holders are weak drivers on the pin and, for as long as CVDD is "OFF" and I/O power is "ON", they hold the last state on the pin. If an external device is strongly driving the device I/O pin to the opposite state then the bus-holder will flip state to match the external driver and DC current will stop. This bus-holder feature prevents unnecessary power consumption when CVDD is "OFF"and I/O supply is "ON". For example, current caused by undriven pins (input buffer oscillation) and/or DC current flowing through pullups or pulldowns. If external pullup or pulldown resistors are implemented, then care should be taken that those pullup/pulldown resistors can exceed the internal bus-holder's max current and thereby cause the busholder to flip state to match the state of the external pullup or pulldown. Otherwise, DC current will flow unnecessarily. When CVDD power is applied, the bus holders are disabled (for further details on bus holders, see Section 5.3.2, Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down). 3.8.3 CLKOUT Pin For debug purposes, the DSP includes a CLKOUT pin which can be used to tap different clocks within the clock generator. The SRC bits of the CLKOUT Control Source Register (CCSSR) can be used to specify the source for the CLKOUT pin. Note: The bootloader disables the CLKOUT pin via CLKOFF bit in the ST3_55 CPU register. For more information on the ST3_55 CPU register, see the TMS320C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073). 62 Device Configuration Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 4 Device Operating Conditions For the device maximum operating frequency, see Section 6.1.2, Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature. 4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range (Unless Otherwise Noted) (1) Supply voltage ranges: Input and Output voltage ranges: Operating case temperature ranges, Tc: Digital Core (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3) (2) –0.5 V to 1.7 V I/O, 1.8 V, 2.5 V, 2.75 V, 3.3 V (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC) 3.3V USB supplies USB PHY (USB_VDDOSC, USB_VDDPLL, USB_VDDA3P3) (2) –0.5 V to 4.2 V LDOI –0.5 V to 4.2 V Analog, 1.3 V (VDDA_PLL, USB_VDDA1P3, VDDA_ANA) (2) –0.5 V to 1.7 V VI I/O, All pins with DVDDIO or DVDDEMIF or USB_VDDOSC or USB_VDDPLL or USB_VDDA3P3 as supply source –0.5 V to 4.2 V VO I/O, All pins with DVDDIO or DVDDEMIF or USB_VDDOSC or USB_VDDPLLor USB_VDDA3P3 as supply source –0.5 V to 4.2 V RTC_XI and RTC_XO –0.5 V to 1.7 V USB_VBUS Input –0.5 V to 5.5 V VO, BG_CAP –0.5 V to 1.7 V ANA_LDOO, DSP_LDOO, and USB_LDOO –0.5 V to 1.7 V Commercial Temperature (default) -10°C to 70°C Industrial Temperature -40°C to 85°C Storage temperature range, Tstg (default) Device Operating Life Power-On Hours (POH) DSP Operating Frequency (SYSCLK ) ≤100 MHz 100 MHz - ≤120 MHz 1000 V > 250 V Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. All voltage values are with respect to VSS. This information is provided solely for your convenience and does not extend or modify the warranty provided under TI’s standard terms and conditions for TI semiconductor products. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) to measure device sensitivity/immunity to damage caused by electrostatic discharges into the device. Level listed is the passing level per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001-2010. JEDEC document JEP155 states that 500 V HBM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process, and manufacturing with less than 500 V HBM is possible if necessary precautions are taken. Pins listed as 1000 V may actually have higher performance. Level listed is the passing level per EIA-JEDEC JESD22-C101E. JEDEC document JEP157 states that 250 V CDM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process. Pins listed as 250 V may actually have higher performance. Device Operating Conditions Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 63 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 4.2 www.ti.com Recommended Operating Conditions MIN Core Supplies NOM 0.998 MAX UNIT 1.15 V 1.43 V 1.43 V CVDD Supply voltage, Digital Core CVDDRTC Supply voltage, RTC and RTC OSC USB_VDD1P3 Supply voltage, Digital USB 1.24 1.3 1.43 V USB_VDDA1P3 Supply voltage, 1.3 V Analog USB 1.24 1.3 1.43 V VDDA_ANA Supply voltage, 1.3 V Pwr Mgmt 1.24 1.3 1.43 V VDDA_PLL Supply voltage, System PLL 1.24 1.3 1.43 V USB_VDDPLL Supply voltage, 3.3 V USB PLL 2.97 3.3 3.63 V Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V 2.97 3.3 3.63 V Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V 2.48 2.75 3.02 V Supply voltage, I/O, 2.5 V 2.25 2.5 2.75 V DVDDIO DVDDEMIF DVDDRTC I/O Supplies GND 60 or 75 MHz 100 or 120 MHz 32.768 KHz 1.24 1.3 0.998 Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V 1.65 1.8 1.98 V USB_VDDOSC Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V USB OSC 2.97 3.3 3.63 V USB_VDDA3P3 Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V Analog USB PHY 2.97 3.3 3.63 V LDOI Supply voltage, Analog Pwr Mgmt and LDO Inputs 3.6 V VSS Supply ground, Digital I/O VSSRTC Supply ground, RTC USB_VSSOSC Supply ground, USB OSC USB_VSSPLL Supply ground, USB PLL USB_VSSA3P3 Supply ground, 3.3 V Analog USB PHY USB_VSSA1P3 Supply ground, USB 1.3 V Analog USB PHY 0 V USB_VSSREF Supply ground, USB Reference Current VSSA_PLL Supply ground, System PLL USB_VSS1P3 Supply ground, 1.3 V Digital USB PHY VSSA_ANA Supply ground, Pwr Mgmt 1.8 0 0 VIH (1) High-level input voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 2.5, 1.8 V I/O (2) 0.7 * DVDD DVDD + 0.3 V VIL (1) Low-level input voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 2.5, 1.8 V I/O (2) -0.3 0.3 * DVDD V Default (Commercial) -10 70 °C (Industrial) Tc Operating case temperature FSYSCLK (1) (2) (3) 64 DSP Operating Frequency (SYSCLK) -40 85 1.05 V 0 60 or 75 (3) MHz °C 1.3 V 0 100 or 120 (3) MHz DVDD refers to the pin I/O supply voltage. To determine the I/O supply voltage for each pin, see Section 2.5, Terminal Functions. The I2C pin SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pin could potentially draw current when the DVDDIO is powered down. Due to the fact that different voltage devices can be connected to I2C bus and the I2C inputs are LVCMOS, the level of logic 0 (low) and logic 1 (high) are not fixed and depend on DVDDIO. For the device maximum operating frequency, see Section 6.1.2, Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature. Device Operating Conditions Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 4.3 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) PARAMETER VOH TEST CONDITIONS VLDO High speed: USB_DN and USB_DP (2) 360 440 IO = IOH 0.8 * DVDD IIH/ IIL (7) High speed: USB_DN and USB_DP (2) –10 10 mV Low-level output voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 2.5, 1.8V I/O IO = IOL Low-level output voltage, I2C pins (3) VDD > 2 V, IOL = 3 mA 0 (8) V 0.4 V 162 mV DVDD = 2.5 V 141 mV DVDD = 1.8 V 122 mV USB_LDOO voltage 1.24 1.3 1.43 V ANA_LDOO voltage 1.24 1.3 1.43 V DSP_LDO_V bit in the LDOCNTL register = 1 1.24 1.3 1.43 V DSP_LDO_V bit in the LDOCNTL register = 0 0.998 1.05 1.15 V DSP_LDO shutdown current (5) LDOI = VMIN 250 mA ANA_LDO shutdown current (5) LDOI = VMIN 4 mA (5) LDOI = VMIN 25 Input only pin, internal pulldown or pullup disabled -5 Input current [DC] (except WAKEUP, and I2C pins) Input current [DC] (except WAKEUP, and I2C pins) High-level output current [DC] Low-level output current [DC] mA +5 μA DVDD = 3.3 V with internal pullup enabled (8) -59 to 161 μA DVDD = 2.5 V with internal pullup enabled (8) -31 to -93 μA DVDD = 1.8 V with internal pullup enabled (8) -14 to -44 -5 μA +5 μA DVDD = 3.3 V with internal pulldown enabled (8) 52 to 158 μA DVDD = 2.5 V with internal pulldown enabled (8) 27 to 83 μA DVDD = 1.8 V with internal pulldown enabled (8) 11 to 35 μA VI = VSS to DVDD with internal pullups and pulldowns disabled. -5 All Pins (except EMIF, and CLKOUT pins) EMIF pins EMIF pins CLKOUT pin (7) 0.2 * DVDD DVDD = 3.3 V +5 μA -4 mA DVDD = 3.3 V -6 mA DVDD = 1.8 V -5 mA DVDD = 3.3 V -6 mA DVDD = 1.8 V -4 All Pins (except USB, EMIF, and CLKOUT pins) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) V V CLKOUT pin IOL (7) mV 0.3 Input current [DC], ALL pins IOH (7) V 0.0 Input only pin, internal pulldown or pullup disabled IIHPD (6) (7) UNIT Full speed: USB_DN and USB_DP (2) USB_LDO shutdown current IILPU (6) (7) MAX USB_VDDA3P3 DSP_LDOO voltage ISD TYP 2.8 Input hysteresis (4) VHYS MIN Full speed: USB_DN and USB_DP (2) High-level output voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 2.5, 1.8 V I/O VOL (1) mA +4 mA DVDD = 3.3 V +6 mA DVDD = 1.8 V +5 mA DVDD = 3.3 V +6 mA DVDD = 1.8 V +4 mA For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or TYP, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table. The USB I/Os adhere to the Universal Bus Specification Revision 2.0 (USB2.0 spec). VDD is the voltage to which the I2C bus pullup resistors are connected. Applies to all input pins except WAKEUP, I2C pins, and USB_MXI. II applies to input-only pins and bi-directional pins. For input-only pins, II indicates the input leakage current. For bi-directional pins, II indicates the input leakage current and off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current. When CVDD power is "ON", the pin bus-holders are disabled. For more detailed information, see Section 5.3.2, Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down. Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor. Device Operating Conditions Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 65 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) (continued) PARAMETER IOZ (9) I/O Off-state output current TEST CONDITIONS (1) All Pins (except USB) MIN TYP -10 Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V IOLBH (10) Bus Holder pull low current when Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V CVDD is powered "OFF" Supply voltage, I/O, 2.5 V Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V IOHBH (10) Bus Holder pull high current when CVDD is powered "OFF" MAX UNIT +10 μA 2.2 mA 1.6 mA 1.4 mA 0.72 mA Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V -1.3 mA Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V -0.97 mA Supply voltage, I/O, 2.5 V -0.83 mA Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V -0.46 mA Active, CVDD = 1.3 V, DSP clock = 100 or 120 MHz, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator 0.22 mW/MHz 0.15 mW/MHz 0.22 mW/MHz 0.14 mW/MHz 0.44 mW 0.26 mW 0.40 mW 0.23 mW 0.28 mW 0.15 mW Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% ADD (typical sine wave data switching) Active, CVDD = 1.05 V, DSP clock = 60 or 75 MHz, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C) , 75% DMAC + 25% ADD (typical data switching) Active, CVDD = 1.3 V, DSP clock = 100 of 120 MHz, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C), 75% DMAC + 25% NOP (typical sine wave data switching) Active, CVDD = 1.05 V, DSP clock = 60 or 75 MHz, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C) , 75% DMAC + 25% NOP (typical data switching) Standby, CVDD = 1.3 V, Master clock disabled, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator P Core (CVDD) supply power (11) Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM and SARAM in active mode Standby, CVDD = 1.05 V, Master clock disabled, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM and SARAM in active mode Standby, CVDD = 1.3 V, Master clock disabled, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in retention and SARAM in active mode Standby, CVDD = 1.05 V, Master clock disabled, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in retention and SARAM in active mode Standby, CVDD = 1.3 V, Master clock disabled, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in active mode and SARAM in retention Standby, CVDD = 1.05 V, Master clock disabled, Clock source = RTC on-chip Oscillator Room Temp (25 °C), DARAM in active mode and SARAM in retention (9) IOZ applies to output-only pins, indicating off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current. (10) This parameter specifies the maximum strength of the Bus Holder and is needed to calculate the minimum strength of external pull-ups and pull-downs. (11) Measured under the following conditions: • At room temperature using units representative of a typical process. • I/O pins are properly terminated. The actual current draw varies across manufacturing processes and is highly application-dependent. For more details on core and I/O activity, as well as information relevant to board power supply design, see Estimating Power Consumption on the TMS320C5504/05/14/15/32/33/34/35 DSPs (literature number SPRABM0). 66 Device Operating Conditions Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) (continued) PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS (1) MIN TYP VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V Room Temp (25 °C), Phase detector = 170 kHz, VCO = 120 MHz MAX UNIT I Analog PLL (VDDA_PLL) supply current CI Input capacitance 4 pF Co Output capacitance 4 pF 0.7 mA 5 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications 5.1 Parameter Information Tester Pin Electronics 42 Ω 3.5 nH Transmission Line Z0 = 50 Ω (see Note) 4.0 pF 1.85 pF Data Sheet Timing Reference Point Output Under Test Device Pin (see Note) NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns) from the data sheet timings. Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin. Figure 5-1. 3.3-V Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving. 5.1.1 1.8-V, 2.5-V, 2.75-V, and 3.3-V Signal Transition Levels All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks, VOL MAX and VOH MIN for output clocks. Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN) Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX) Figure 5-2. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels 5.1.2 3.3-V Signal Transition Rates All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns). Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 67 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.1.3 www.ti.com Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis The timing parameter values specified in this data manual do not include delays by board routing. As a good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences. 5.2 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic manner. 5.3 Power Supplies The device includes four core voltage-level supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3), and several I/O supplies (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3), as well as several analog supplies (LDOI, VDDA_PLL, VDDA_ANA, and USB_VDDPLL). Note: CVDDRTC must be externally powered. None of the on-chip LDOs can be used to power CVDDRTC. Some TI power-supply devices include features that facilitate power sequencing—for example, Auto-Track and Slow-Start/Enable features. For more information regarding TI's power management products and suggested devices to power TI DSPs, visit www.ti.com/processorpower. 5.3.1 Power-Supply Sequencing The device includes four core voltage-level supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3), and several I/O supplies including DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3. If the DSP_LDO is disabled (DSP_LDO_EN = high) and an external regulator supplies power to the CPU Core (CVDD), the external reset signal (RESET) must be held asserted until all of the supply voltages reach their valid operating ranges. Note: the external reset signal on the RESET pin must be held low until all of the power supplies reach their operating voltage conditions. The I/O design allows either the core supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3) or the I/O supplies (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3) to be powered up for an indefinite period of time while the other supply is not powered if the following constraints are met: 1. All maximum ratings and recommended operating conditions are satisfied. 2. All warnings about exposure to maximum rated and recommended conditions, particularly junction temperature are satisfied. These apply to power transitions as well as normal operation. 3. Bus contention while core supplies are powered must be limited to 100 hours over the projected lifetime of the device. 4. Bus contention while core supplies are powered down does not violate the absolute maximum ratings. If the USB subsystem is used, the subsystem must be powered up in the following sequence: 1. USB_VDDA1P3 and USB_VDD1P3 2. USB_VDDA3P3 3. USB_VBUS If the USB subsystem is not used, the following can be powered off: • USB Core – USB_VDD1P3 – USB_VDDA1P3 68 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com • SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 USB PHY and I/O Level Supplies – USB_VDDOSC – USB_VDDA3P3 – USB_VDDPLL A supply bus is powered up when the voltage is within the recommended operating range. It is powered down when the voltage is below that range, either stable or while in transition. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 69 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.3.2 www.ti.com Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down With some exceptions (listed below), all digital I/O pins on the device have special features to allow powering down of the Digital Core Domain (CVDD) without causing I/O contentions or floating inputs at the pins (see Figure 5-3). The device asserts the internal signal called HHV high when power has been removed from the Digital Core Domain (CVDD). Asserting the internal HHV signal causes the following conditions to occur in any order: • All output pin strong drivers to go to the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state • Weak bus holders to be enabled to hold the pin at a valid high or low • The internal pullups or pulldowns (IPUs/IPDs) on the I/O pins will be disabled The exception pins that do not have this special feature are: • Pins driven by the CVDDRTC Power Domain [This power domain is "Always On"; therefore, the pins driven by CVDDRTC do not need these special features]: – RTC_XI, RTC_XO, RTC_CLKOUT, and WAKEUP • USB Pins: – USB_DP, USB_DM, USB_R1, USB_VBUS, USB_MXI, and USB_MXO • Pins for the Analog Block: – DSP_LDO_EN and BG_CAP DVDD Y PAD A GZ hhvgz HHV OR HHV PI OR hhvpi HHV Figure 5-3. Bus Holder I/O Circuit NOTE Figure 5-3 shows both a pullup and pulldown but pins only have one, not both. PI = Pullup/Pulldown Inhibit GZ = Output Enable (active low) HHV = Described in Section 5.3.2 70 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 5.3.3 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Power-Supply Design Considerations Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance applications utilizing the device, the PC board should include separate power planes for core, I/O, VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL (which can share the same PCB power plane), and ground; all bypassed with high–quality low–ESL/ESR capacitors. 5.3.4 Power-Supply Decoupling In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place capacitors (caps) as close as possible to the device. These caps need to be no more than 1.25 cm maximum distance from the device power pins to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better but need to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. Parasitic inductance limits the effectiveness of the decoupling capacitors, therefore physically smaller capacitors should be used while maintaining the largest available capacitance value. Larger caps for each supply can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the order of 10 μF) should be furthest away, but still as close as possible. Large caps for each supply should be placed outside of the BGA footprint. As with the selection of any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product's production lifetime should be considered. The recommended decoupling capacitance for the DSP core supplies should be 1 μF in parallel with 0.01μF capacitor per supply pin. 5.3.5 LDO Input Decoupling The LDO inputs should follow the same decoupling guidelines as other power-supply pins above. 5.3.6 LDO Output Decoupling The LDO circuits implement a voltage feedback control system which has been designed to optimize gain and stability tradeoffs. As such, there are design assumptions for the amount of capacitance on the LDO outputs. For proper device operation, the following external decoupling capacitors should be used when the on-chip LDOs are enabled: • ANA_LDOO– 1μF • DSP_LDOO – 5μF ~ 10μF • USB_LDOO – 1μF ~ 2μF Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 71 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.4 www.ti.com External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and USB_MXI Pins The device DSP includes two options to provide an external clock input to the system clock generator: • Use the on-chip real-time clock (RTC) oscillator with an external 32.768-kHz crystal connected to the RTC_XI and RTC_XO pins. • Use an external 11.2896-, 12.0-, or 12.288-MHz LVCMOS clock input fed into the CLKIN pin that operates at the same voltage as the DVDDIO supply (1.8-, 2.5-, 2.75-, or 3.3-V). The CLK_SEL pin determines which input is used as the clock source for the system clock generator. For more details, see Section 3.5.1, Device and Peripheral Configurations at Device Reset. The crystal for the RTC oscillator is not required if CLKIN is used as the system reference clock; however, the RTC must still be powered by an external power source. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC. The RTC registers starting at I/O address 1900h will not be accessible without an RTC clock. This includes the RTC Power Management Register which provides control to the on-chip LDOs and WAKEUP and RTC_CLKOUT pins. Section 5.4.1, Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal provides more details on using the RTC on-chip oscillator with an external crystal. Section 5.4.2, CLKIN Pin With LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input provides details on using an external LVCMOS-compatible clock input fed into the CLKIN pin. Additionally, the USB requires a reference clock generated using a dedicated on-chip oscillator with a 12MHz external crystal connected to the USB_MXI and USB_MXO pins. The USB reference clock is not required if the USB peripheral is not being used. Section 5.4.3, USB On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal provides details on using the USB on-chip oscillator with an external crystal. 5.4.1 Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal The on-chip oscillator requires an external 32.768-kHz crystal connected across the RTC_XI and RTC_XO pins, along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-4. The external crystal load capacitors must be connected only to the RTC oscillator ground pin (VSSRTC). Do not connect to board ground (VSS). Position the VSS lead on the board between RTC_XI and RTC_XO as a shield to reduce direct capacitance between RTC_XI and RTC_XO leads on the board. The CVDDRTC pin can be connected to the same power supply as CVDD , or may be connected to a different supply that meets the recommended operating conditions (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions), if desired. RTC_XI RTC_XO VSSRTC VSS CVDDRTC CVDD Crystal 32.768 kHz C1 C2 0.998-1.43 V 1.05/1.3 V Figure 5-4. 32.768-kHz RTC Oscillator 72 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 The crystal should be in fundamental-mode function, and parallel resonant, with a maximum effective series resistance (ESR) specified in Table 5-1. The load capacitors, C1 and C2, are the total capacitance of the circuit board and components, excluding the IC and crystal. The load capacitors values are usually approximately twice the value of the crystal's load capacitance, CL, which is specified in the crystal manufacturer's datasheet and should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied. All discrete components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the associated oscillator pins (RTC_XI and RTC_XO) and to the VSSRTC pin. CL = C1 C2 (C1 + C2 ) Table 5-1. Input Requirements for Crystal on the 32.768-kHz RTC Oscillator PARAMETER MIN Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 32.768-kHz) (1) 0.2 Oscillation frequency NOM MAX UNIT 2 32.768 sec kHz ESR 100 kΩ Maximum shunt capacitance 1.6 pF Maximum crystal drive 1.0 μW (1) The startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and the capacitive load of the crystal. 5.4.2 CLKIN Pin With LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input (Optional) Note: If CLKIN is not used, the pin must be tied low. A LVCMOS-compatible clock input of a frequency less than 24 MHz can be fed into the CLKIN pin for use by the DSP system clock generator. The external connections are shown in Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6. The bootloader assumes that the CLKIN pin is connected to the LVCMOS-compatible clock source with a frequency of 11.2896-, 12.0-, or 12.288-MHz. These frequencies were selected to support boot mode peripheral speeds of 500 KHz for SPI and 400 KHz for I2C. These clock frequencies are achieved by dividing the CLKIN value by 25 for SPI and by 32 for I2C. If a faster external clock is input, then these boot modes will run at faster clock speeds. If the system design utilizes faster peripherals or these boot modes are not used, CLKIN values higher than 12.288 MHz can be used. Note: The CLKIN pin operates at the same voltage as the DVDDIO supply (1.8-, 2.5-, 2.75-, or 3.3-V). In this configuration the RTC oscillator can be optionally disabled by connecting RTC_XI to CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to ground (VSS). However, when the RTC oscillator is disabled the RTC registers starting at I/O address 1900h will not be accessible. This includes the RTC Power Management Register which provides control to the on-chip LDOs and WAKEUP and RTC_CLKOUT pins. Note: the RTC must still be powered by an external power source even if the RTC oscillator is disabled. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC. For more details on the RTC on-chip oscillator, see Section 5.4.1, Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 73 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 CLKIN www.ti.com RTC_XI RTC_XO VSSRTC CVDDRTC VSS CVDD Crystal 32.768 kHz C1 C2 0.998-1.43 V 1.05/1.3 V Figure 5-5. LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input With RTC Oscillator Enabled CLKIN RTC_XI CVDDRTC RTC_XO VSS VSSRTC CVDD 1.05/1.3 V 0.998-1.43 V Figure 5-6. LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input With RTC Oscillator Disabled 5.4.3 USB On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal (Optional) When using the USB, the USB on-chip oscillator requires an external 12-MHz crystal connected across the USB_MXI and USB_MXO pins, along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-7. The external crystal load capacitors must be connected only to the USB oscillator ground pin (USB_VSSOSC). Do not connect to board ground (VSS). The USB_VDDOSC pin can be connected to the same power supply as USB_VDDA3P3. The USB on-chip oscillator can be permanently disabled, via tie-offs, if the USB peripheral is not being used. To permanently disable the USB oscillator, connect the USB_MXI pin to ground (VSS) and leave the USB_MXO pin unconnected. The USB oscillator power pins (USB_VDDOSC and USB_VSSOSC) should also be connected to ground, as shown in Figure 5-8. When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 4.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is connected to board ground (VSS). 74 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 USB_MXI USB_MXO USB_VSSOSC USB_VDDOSC VSS USB_VDDA3P3 Crystal 12 MHz C1 C2 3.3 V 3.3 V Figure 5-7. 12-MHz USB Oscillator USB_MXI USB_MXO USB_VSSOSC USB_VDDOSC VSS USB_VDDA3P3 Figure 5-8. Connections when USB Oscillator is Permanently Disabled The crystal should be in fundamental-mode operation, and parallel resonant, with a maximum effective series resistance (ESR) specified in Table 5-2. The load capacitors, C1 and C2 are the total capacitance of the circuit board and components, excluding the IC and crystal. The load capacitor value is usually approximately twice the value of the crystal's load capacitance, CL, which is specified in the crystal manufacturer's datasheet and should be chosen such that the equation below is satisfied. All discrete components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the associated oscillator pins (USB_MXI and USB_MXO) and to the USB_VSSOSC pin. CL = C1 C2 (C1 + C2 ) Table 5-2. Input Requirements for Crystal on the 12-MHz USB Oscillator PARAMETER MIN Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 12 MHz) (1) Oscillation frequency (2) Maximum shunt capacitance Maximum crystal drive (1) (2) MAX 10 12 ESR Frequency stability NOM 0.100 UNIT ms MHz 100 Ω ±100 ppm 5 pF 330 μW The startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and the capacitive load of the crystal. If the USB is used, a 12-MHz, ±100-ppm crystal is recommended. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 75 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.5 www.ti.com Clock PLLs The device DSP uses a software-programmable PLL to generate frequencies required by the CPU, DMA, and peripherals. The reference clock for the PLL is taken from either the CLKIN pin or the RTC on-chip oscillator (as specified through the CLK_SEL pin). 5.5.1 PLL Device-Specific Information There is a minimum and maximum operating frequency for CLKIN, PLLOUT, and the system clock (SYSCLK). The system clock generator must be configured not to exceed any of these constraints documented in this section (certain combinations of external clock inputs, internal dividers, and PLL multiply ratios are not supported). Table 5-3. PLL Clock Frequency Ranges CLOCK SIGNAL NAME CVDD = 1.05 V VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V MIN MAX MIN 11.2896 12 12.288 CLKIN (1) RTC Clock PLLIN CVDD = 1.3 V VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V 32.768 UNIT MAX 11.2896 12 12.288 MHz 32.768 KHz 32.768 170 32.768 170 KHz PLLOUT 60 120 60 120 MHz SYSCLK 0.032768 60 or 75 0.032768 100 or 120 MHz 4 ms PLL_LOCKTIME (1) 4 These CLKIN values are used when the CLK_SEL pin = 1. The PLL has lock time requirements that must be followed. The PLL lock time is the amount of time needed for the PLL to complete its phase-locking sequence. 5.5.2 Clock PLL Considerations With External Clock Sources If the CLKIN pin is used to provide the reference clock to the PLL, to minimize the clock jitter a single clean power supply should power both the device and the external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For the input clock timing requirements, see Section 5.5.3, Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks). Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external clock source must meet the device requirements in this data manual (see Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature, and Section 5.5.3, Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks). 76 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 5.5.3 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks) Table 5-4. Timing Requirements for CLKIN (1) (2) (see Figure 5-9) CVDD = 1.05 V NO. MIN CVDD = 1.3 V NOM MAX MIN NOM 88.577, 83.333, or 81.380 Cycle time, external clock driven on CLKIN UNIT MAX 88.577, 83.333, or 81.380 1 tc(CLKIN) 2 tw(CLKINH) Pulse width, CLKIN high 0.466 * tc(CLKIN) 0.466 * tc(CLKIN) ns 3 tw(CLKINL) Pulse width, CLKIN low 0.466 * tc(CLKIN) 0.466 * tc(CLKIN) ns 4 tt(CLKIN) (1) Transition time, CLKIN ns 4 4 ns The CLKIN frequency and PLL multiply factor should be chosen such that the resulting clock frequency is within the specific range for CPU operating frequency. The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN. (2) 1 4 1 2 CLKIN 3 4 Figure 5-9. CLKIN Timing Table 5-5. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT (1) (see Figure 5-10) NO. CVDD = 1.3 V VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V UNIT MIN MAX MIN MAX P 16.67 or 13.33 P 10 or 8.3 1 tc(CLKOUT) Cycle time, CLKOUT 2 tw(CLKOUTH) Pulse duration, CLKOUT high 0.466 * tc(CLKOUT) 0.466 * tc(CLKOUT) ns 3 tw(CLKOUTL) Pulse duration, CLKOUT low 0.466 * tc(CLKOUT) 0.466 * tc(CLKOUT) ns 4 tt(CLKOUTR) Transition time (rise), CLKOUT 5 5 ns tt(CLKOUTF) Transition time (fall), CLKOUT 5 5 ns 5 (1) (2) CVDD = 1.05 V VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V PARAMETER (2) ns The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN. P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when SYSCLK frequency is 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. 2 5 1 CLKOUT 3 4 Figure 5-10. CLKOUT Timing Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 77 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.6 www.ti.com Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller The DMA controller is used to move data among internal memory, external memory, and peripherals without intervention from the CPU and in the background of CPU operation. The DSP includes a total of four DMA controllers. Aside from the DSP resources they can access, all four DMA controllers are identical. The DMA controller has the following features: • Operation that is independent of the CPU. • Four channels, which allow the DMA controller to keep track of the context of four independent block transfers. • Event synchronization. DMA transfers in each channel can be made dependent on the occurrence of selected events. • An interrupt for each channel. Each channel can send an interrupt to the CPU on completion of the programmed transfer. • Ping-Pong mode allows the DMA controller to keep track of double buffering context without CPU intervention. • A dedicated clock idle domain. The four device DMA controllers can be put into a low-power state by independently turning off their input clocks. 5.6.1 DMA Channel Synchronization Events The DMA controllers allow activity in their channels to be synchronized to selected events. The DSP supports 20 separate synchronization events and each channel can be tied to separate sync events independent of the other channels. Synchronization events are selected by programming the CHnEVT field in the DMAn channel event source registers (DMAnCESR1 and DMAnCESR2). 78 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 5.7 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Reset The device has two main types of reset: hardware reset and software reset. Hardware reset is responsible for initializing all key states of the device. It occurs whenever the RESET pin is asserted or when the internal power-on-reset (POR) circuit deasserts an internal signal called POWERGOOD. The device's internal POR is a voltage comparator that monitors the DSP_LDOO pin voltage and generates the internal POWERGOOD signal when the DSP_LDO is enabled externally by the DSP_LDO_EN pin. POWERGOOD is asserted when the DSP_LDOO voltage is above a minimum threshold voltage provided by the bandgap. When the DSP_LDO is disabled (DSP_LDO_EN is high), the internal voltage comparator becomes inactive, and the POWERGOOD signal logic level is immediately set high. The RESET pin and the POWERGOOD signal are internally combined with a logical AND gate to produce an (active low) hardware reset (see Figure 5-11, Power-On Reset Timing Requirements and Figure 5-12, Reset Timing Requirements). There are two types of software reset: the CPU's software reset instruction and the software control of the peripheral reset signals. For more information on the CPU's software reset instruction, see the TMS320C55x CPU 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature number: SWPU073). In all the device documentation, all references to "reset" refer to hardware reset. Any references to software reset will explicitly state software reset. The device RTC has one additional type of reset, a power-on-reset (POR) for the registers in the RTC core. This POR monitors the voltage of CVDDRTC and resets the RTC registers when power is first applied to the RTC core. 5.7.1 Power-On Reset (POR) Circuits The device includes two power-on reset (POR) circuits, one for the RTC (RTC POR) and another for the rest of the chip (MAIN POR). 5.7.1.1 RTC Power-On Reset (POR) The RTC POR ensures that the flip-flops in the CVDDRTC power domain have an initial state upon powerup. In particular, the RTCNOPWR register is reset by this POR and is used to indicate that the RTC time registers need to be initialized with the current time and date when power is first applied. 5.7.1.2 Main Power-On Reset (POR) The device includes an analog power-on reset (POR) circuit that keeps the DSP in reset until specific voltages have reached predetermined levels. When the DSP_LDO is enabled externally by the DSP_LDO_EN pin, the output of the POR circuit, POWERGOOD, is held low until the following conditions are satisfied: • LDOI is powered and the bandgap is active for at least approximately 8 ms • VDD_ANA is powered for at least approximately 4 ms • DSP_LDOO is above a threshold of approximately 950 mV (see Note:) Note: The POR comparator has hysteresis, so the threshold voltage becomes approximately 850 mV after POWERGOOD signal is set high. Once these conditions are met, the internal POWERGOOD signal is set high. The POWERGOOD signal is internally combined with the RESET pin signal, via an AND-gate, to produce the DSP subsystem's global reset. This global reset is the hardware reset for the whole chip, except the RTC. When the global reset is deasserted (high), the boot sequence starts. For more detailed information on the boot sequence, see Section 3.4, Boot Sequence. When the DSP_LDO is disabled (DSP_LDO_EN pin = 1), the voltage monitoring on the DSP_LDOO pin is de-activated and the POWERGOOD signal is immediately set high. The RESET pin will be the sole source of hardware reset. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 79 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.7.1.3 www.ti.com Reset Pin (RESET) The device can receive an external reset signal on the RESET pin. As specified above in Section 5.7.1.2, Main Power-On Reset, the RESET pin is combined with the internal POWERGOOD signal, that is generated by the MAIN POR, via an AND-gate. The output of the AND gate provides the hardware reset to the chip. The RESET pin may be tied high and the MAIN POR can provide the hardware reset in case DSP_LDO is enabled (DSP_LDO_EN = 0), but an external hardware reset must be provided via the RESET pin when the DSP_LDO is disabled (DSP_LDO_EN = 1). Once the hardware reset is applied, the system clock generator is enabled and the DSP starts the boot sequence. For more information on the boot sequence, see Section 3.4, Boot Sequence. 5.7.2 Pin Behavior at Reset During normal operation, pins are controlled by the respective peripheral selected in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. During power-on reset and reset, the behavior of the output pins changes and is categorized as follows: 80 • High Group: EM_CS4, EM_CS5, EM_CS2, EM_CS3, EM_DQM0, EM_DQM1, EM_OE, EM_WE, SPI_CS3, EM_SDCAS, EM_SDRAS • Low Group: SPI_CLK, EM_R/W, MMC0_CLK/I2S0_CLK/GP[0], MMC1_CLK/I2S1_CLK/GP[6], EM_SDCLK • Z Group: EM_D[15:0], EMU[1:0], SCL, SDA, SPI_RX, SPI_TX, I2S2_RX/GP[20]/SPI_RX, I2S2_DX/GP[27]/SPI_TX, I2S2_RTS/GP[28]/I2S3_CLK, I2S2_CTS/GP[29]/I2S3_RS, I2S2_RXD/GP[30]/I2S3_RX, I2S2_TXD/GP[31]/I2S3_DX, GP[12], GP[13], GP[14], GP[15], GP[16], GP[17], I2S2_CLK/GP[18]/SPI_CLK,/I2S2_FS/GP[19]/SPI_CS0, RTC_CLKOUT, MMC0_CMD/I2S0_FS/GP[1], MMC0_D0/I2S0_DX/GP[2], MMC0_D1/I2S0_RX/GP[3], MMC0_D2/GP[4], MMC0_D3/GP[5], MMC1_CMD/I2S1_FS/GP[7], MMC1_D0/2S1_DX/GP[8], MMC1_D1/I2S1_RX/GP[9], MMC1_D2/GP[10], MMC1_D3/GP[11], TDO, WAKEUP • CLKOUT Group: CLKOUT, SPI_CS1 • SYNCH 0→1 Group: SPI_CS0, SPI_CS2, EM_SDCKE • SYNCH 1→0 Group: EM_CS0, EM_CS1 • SYNCH X→1 Group: EM_BA[1:0], XF • SYNCH X→0 Group: EM_A[20:0] Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 5.7.3 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Reset Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-6. Timing Requirements for Reset (see Figure 5-11 and Figure 5-12) CVDD = 1.05 V NO. 1 MIN tw(RSTL) Pulse duration, RESET low CVDD = 1.3 V MAX 3P MIN MAX 3P UNIT ns POWERGOOD (Internal) RESET POWERGOOD and RESET (Internal) LOW Group HIGH Group Z Group SYNCH X® 0 Group SYNCH X® 1 Group SYNCH 0® 1 Group SYNCH 1® 0 Group Valid Clock CLKOUT 65536 + 38 clocks if CLK_SEL = 1, 32 + 38 clocks if CLK_SEL = 0 Figure 5-11. Power-On Reset Timing Requirements Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 81 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com POWERGOOD (Internal) RESET tw(RSTL) POWERGOOD and RESET (Internal) LOW Group HIGH Group Z Group SYNCH X ® 0 Group SYNCH X ® 1 Group SYNCH 0 ® 1 Group SYNCH 1 ® 0 Group Valid Clock CLKOUT 65536 + 38 clocks if CLK_SEL = 1, 32 + 38 clocks if CLK_SEL = 0 Figure 5-12. Reset Timing Requirements 82 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 5.8 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Wake-up Events, Interrupts, and XF The device has a number of interrupts to service the needs of its peripherals. The interrupts can be selectively enabled or disabled. 5.8.1 Interrupts Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-7. Timing Requirements for Interrupts (1) (see Figure 5-13) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. MIN (1) UNIT MAX 1 tw(INTH) Pulse duration, interrupt high CPU active 2P ns 2 tw(INTL) Pulse duration, interrupt low CPU active 2P ns P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked att 120 MHz, use P = 8.3 ns. 1 INTx 2 Figure 5-13. External Interrupt Timings 5.8.2 Wake-Up From IDLE Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-8. Timing Requirements for Wake-Up From IDLE (see Figure 5-14) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. MIN 1 tw(WKPL) Pulse duration, WAKEUP or INTx low, SYSCLKDIS = 1 UNIT MAX 30.5 µs Table 5-9. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For Wake-Up From IDLE (1) (2) (3) (4) (see Figure 5-14) NO. CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V PARAMETER MIN 2 td(WKEVTH-C KLGEN) UNIT MAX IDLE3 Mode with SYSCLKDIS = 1, WAKEUP or INTx event, CLK_SEL = 1 D ns Delay time, WAKEUP pulse complete to IDLE3 Mode with SYSCLKDIS = 1, CPU active WAKEUP or INTx event, CLK_SEL = 0 C ns 3P ns IDLE2 Mode; INTx event (1) (2) (3) (4) TYP D = 1/ External Clock Frequency (CLKIN). C = 1/RTCCLK= 30.5 μs. RTCCLK is the clock output of the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator. P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. Assumes the internal LDOs are used with a 0.1uF bandgap capacitor. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 83 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 2 CLKOUT 1 WAKEUP INTx A. B. C. D. INT[1:0] can only be used as a wake-up event for IDLE3 and IDLE2 modes. RTC interrupt (internal signal) can be used as wake-up event for IDLE3 and IDLE2 modes. Any unmasked interrupt can be used to exit the IDLE2 mode. CLKOUT reflects either the CPU clock, USB PHY, or PLL clock dependent on the setting of the CLOCKOUT Clock Source Register. For this diagram, CLKOUT refers to the CPU clock. Figure 5-14. Wake-Up From IDLE Timings 5.8.3 XF Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-10. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For XF (1) (see Figure 5-15) NO. 1 (1) (2) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V PARAMETER td(XF) (2) Delay time, CLKOUT high to XF high MIN MAX 0 10.2 UNIT ns P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. C = 1/RTCCLK= 30.5 μs. RTCCLK is the clock output of the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator. (A) CLKOUT 1 XF A. CLKOUT reflects either the CPU clock, USB PHY, or PLL clock dependent on the setting of the CLOCKOUT Clock Source Register. For this diagram, CLKOUT refers to the CPU clock. Figure 5-15. XF Timings 84 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 5.9 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 External Memory Interface (EMIF) The device supports several memories and external device interfaces, including: NOR Flash, NAND Flash, SRAM, Non-Mobile SDRAM, and Mobile SDRAM (mSDRAM). Note: The device can support non-mobile SDRAM under certain circumstances. The device also always uses mobile SDRAM initialization, but it is able to support SDRAM memories that ignore the BA0 and BA1 pins for the 'load mode register' command. During the mobile SDRAM initialization, the device issues the 'load mode register' initialization command to two different addresses that differ in only the BA0 and BA1 address bits. These registers are the Extended Mode register and the Mode register. The Extended mode register exists only in mSDRAM and not in non-mSDRAM. If a non-mobile SDRAM memory ignores bits BA0 and BA1, the second loaded register value overwrites the first, leaving the desired value in the Mode register and the non-mobile SDRAM will work with the device. The EMIF provides an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus, an address bus width up to 21 bits, and 6 chip selects, along with memory control signals. The EM_A[20:15] address signals are multiplexed with the GPIO peripheral and controlled by the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR). For more detail on the pin muxing, see the Section 3.6.1, External Bus Selection Register (EBSR). 5.9.1 EMIF Asynchronous Memory Support The EMIF supports asynchronous: • SRAM memories • NAND Flash memories • NOR Flash memories The EMIF data bus can be configured for both 8- or 16-bit width. The device supports up to 21 address lines and four external wait/interrupt inputs. Up to four asynchronous chip selects are supported by EMIF (EM_CS[5:2]). Each chip select has the following individually programmable attributes: • Data bus width • Read cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe • Write cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe • Bus turn around time • Extended Wait Option With Programmable Timeout • Select Strobe Option • NAND flash controller supports 1-bit and 4-bit ECC calculation on blocks of 512 bytes 5.9.2 EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported The EMIF supports 16-bit non-mobile and mobile single data rate (SDR) SDRAM in addition to the asynchronous memories listed in Section 5.9.1, EMIF Asynchronous Memory Support. The supported SDRAM and mobile SDRAM configurations are: • One, two, and four bank SDRAM/mSDRAM devices • Supports devices with eight, nine, ten, and eleven column addresses • CAS latency of two or three clock cycles • 16-bit data-bus width • 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 -V LVCMOS interface that is separate from the rest of the chip I/Os. • One (EM_CS0) or two (EM_CS[1:0]) chip selects Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 85 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Additionally, the SDRAM/mSDRAM interface of EMIF supports placing the SDRAM/mSDRAM in "SelfRefresh" and "Powerdown Modes". Self-Refresh mode allows the SDRAM/mSDRAM to be put into a lowpower state while still retaining memory contents; since the SDRAM/mSDRAM will continue to refresh itself even without clocks from the DSP. Powerdown mode achieves even lower power, except the DSP must periodically wake the SDRAM/mSDRAM up and issue refreshes if data retention is required. To achieve the lowest power consumption, the SDRAM/mSDRAM interface has configurable slew rate on the EMIF pins. The device has limitations to the clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin based on the CVDD and DVDDEMIF. • The clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin can be configured either as SYSCLK (DSP Operating Frequency) or SYSCLK/2 via bit 0 of the ECDR Register (0x1C26h) • When CVDD = 1.3 V and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 100 MHz (EM_SDCLK ≤ 100 MHz). Therefore, if SYSCLK ≤ 100 MHz, the EM_SDCLK can be configured either as SYSCLK or SYSCLK/2, but if SYSCLK > 100 MHz, the EM_SDCLK must be configured as SYSCLK/2. • When CVDD =1.05 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 60 MHz (EM_SDCLK ≤ 60 MHz). Therefore, if SYSCLK ≤ 60 MHz, the EM_SDCLK can be configured as either SYSCLK or SYSCLK/2, but if SYSCLK > 60 MHz, the EM_SDCLK must be configured as SYSCLK/2. • When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, regardless of the CVDD voltage, the clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin must be configured as SYSCLK/2 and ≤ 50 MHz. 5.9.3 EMIF Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-11 shows the EMIF registers. Table 5-11. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Peripheral Registers (1) HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM 1000h REV (1) 86 REGISTER NAME Revision Register 1001h STATUS Status Register 1004h AWCCR1 Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register 1 1005h AWCCR2 Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register 2 1008h SDCR1 SDRAM/mSDRAM Configuration Register 1 1009h SDCR2 SDRAM/mSDRAM Configuration Register 2 100Ch SDRCR SDRAM/mSDRAM Refresh Control Register 1010h ACS2CR1 Asynchronous CS2 Configuration Register 1 1011h ACS2CR2 Asynchronous CS2 Configuration Register 2 1014h ACS3CR1 Asynchronous CS3 Configuration Register 1 1015h ACS3CR2 Asynchronous CS3 Configuration Register 2 1018h ACS4CR1 Asynchronous CS4 Configuration Register 1 1019h ACS4CR2 Asynchronous CS4 Configuration Register 2 101Ch ACS5CR1 Asynchronous CS5 Configuration Register 1 101Dh ACS5CR2 Asynchronous CS5 Configuration Register 2 1020h SDTIMR1 SDRAM/mSDRAM Timing Register 1 1021h SDTIMR2 SDRAM/mSDRAM Timing Register 2 103Ch SDSRETR SDRAM/mSDRAM Self Refresh Exit Timing Register 1040h EIRR EMIF Interrupt Raw Register 1044h EIMR EMIF Interrupt Mask Register 1048h EIMSR EMIF Interrupt Mask Set Register Before reading or writing to the EMIF registers, be sure to set the BYTEMODE bits to 00b in the EMIF system control register to enable word accesses to the EMIF registers. Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-11. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Peripheral Registers(1) (continued) HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM REGISTER NAME 104Ch EIMCR 1060h NANDFCR EMIF Interrupt Mask Clear Register NAND Flash Control Register 1064h NANDFSR1 NAND Flash Status Register 1 1065h NANDFSR2 NAND Flash Status Register 2 1068h PGMODECTRL1 Page Mode Control Register 1 1069h PGMODECTRL2 Page Mode Control Register 2 1070h NCS2ECC1 NAND Flash CS2 1-Bit ECC Register 1 1071h NCS2ECC2 NAND Flash CS2 1-Bit ECC Register 2 1074h NCS3ECC1 NAND Flash CS3 1-Bit ECC Register 1 1075h NCS3ECC2 NAND Flash CS3 1-Bit ECC Register 2 1078h NCS4ECC1 NAND Flash CS4 1-Bit ECC Register 1 1079h NCS4ECC2 NAND Flash CS4 1-Bit ECC Register 2 107Ch NCS5ECC1 NAND Flash CS5 1-Bit ECC Register 1 107Dh NCS5ECC2 NAND Flash CS5 1-Bit ECC Register 2 10BCh NAND4BITECCLOAD NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Load Register 10C0h NAND4BITECC1 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 1 10C1h NAND4BITECC2 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 2 10C4h NAND4BITECC3 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 3 10C5h NAND4BITECC4 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 4 10C8h NAND4BITECC5 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 5 10C9h NAND4BITECC6 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 6 10CCh NAND4BITECC7 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 7 10CDh NAND4BITECC8 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 8 10D0h NANDERRADD1 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 1 10D1h NANDERRADD2 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 2 10D4h NANDERRADD3 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 3 10D5h NANDERRADD4 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 4 10D8h NANDERRVAL1 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 1 10D9h NANDERRVAL2 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 2 10DCh NANDERRVAL3 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 3 10DDh NANDERRVAL4 NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 4 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 87 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.9.4 www.ti.com EMIF Electrical Data/Timing CVDD = 1.05 V, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V, External Loading = 10 pF Table 5-12. Timing Requirements for EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (see Figure 5-16 and Figure 517) CVDD = 1.05 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5 V NO. MIN MAX CVDD = 1.05 V DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V MIN UNIT MAX 19 tsu(DV-CLKH) Input setup time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] before EM_SDCLK rising 3.4 3.4 ns 20 th(CLKH-DIV) Input hold time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] after EM_SDCLK rising 1.2 1.2 ns (1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. Table 5-13. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (2) (see Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17) NO. PARAMETER CVDD = 1.05 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5 V MIN 1 NOM MAX 16.67 (3) CVDD = 1.05 V DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V MIN NOM UNIT MAX 20 (4) tc(CLK) Cycle time, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK 2 tw(CLK) Pulse width, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK high or low 3 td(CLKH-CSV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EMA_CS[1:0] valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns 5 td(CLKH-DQMV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_DQM[1:0] valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns 7 td(CLKH-AV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_A[20:0] and EM_BA[1:0] valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns 9 td(CLKH-DV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_D[15:0] valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns 11 td(CLKH-RASV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDRAS valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns 13 td(CLKH-CASV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCAS valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns 15 td(CLKH-WEV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_WE valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns 21 td(CLKH-CKEV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCKE valid 1.1 13.2 1.1 13.2 ns (1) (2) (3) (4) 88 8.34 ns 10 ns Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 60 or 100 MHz, E = 16.67 or 10 ns, respectively. For more detail on the EM_SDCLK speed see Section 5.9.2, EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported. When CVDD = 1.05 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 60 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 60 MHz). For more information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (literature number SPRUGU6). When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 50 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 50 MHz). For more information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (literature number SPRUGU6). Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-14. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2) (see Figure 5-18, Figure 5-20, and Figure 5-21) CVDD = 1.05 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V NO. MIN NOM UNIT MAX READS and WRITES 2 tw(EM_WAIT) Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion 2E ns 14.5 ns 0 ns (3) 4E + 13 ns tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase (3) 4E + 13 ns READS 12 tsu(EMDV-EMOEH) Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high 13 th(EMOEH-EMDIV) Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high 14 tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT) Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase WRITES 28 (1) (2) (3) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively. Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended wait states. Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-21 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 89 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-15. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2) Figure 5-21) (4) NO. (3) (see Figure 5-19 and CVDD = 1.05 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V PARAMETER MIN UNIT NOM MAX READS and WRITES 1 td(TURNAROUND) Turn around time (TA)*E - 13 (TA)*E (TA)*E + 13 ns READS 3 tc(EMRCYCLE) EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0) (RS+RST+RH)*E - 13 (RS+RST+RH)*E (RS+RST+RH)*E + 13 ns EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1) (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 13 (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E +139 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0) (RS)*E-13 (RS)*E (RS)*E+13 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1) -13 0 +13 ns Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0) (RH)*E - 13 (RH)*E (RH)*E + 13 ns Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1) -13 0 +13 ns 4 tsu(EMCEL-EMOEL) 5 th(EMOEH-EMCEH) 6 tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL) Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low (RS)*E-13 (RS)*E (RS)*E+13 ns 7 th(EMOEH-EMBAIV) Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid (RH)*E-13 (RH)*E (RH)*E+13 ns 8 tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL) Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low (RS)*E-13 (RS)*E (RS)*E+13 ns 9 th(EMOEH-EMAIV) Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid (RH)*E-13 (RH)*E (RH)*E+13 ns EM_OE active low width (EW = 0) (RST)*E-13 (RST)*E (RST)*E+13 ns EM_OE active low width (EW = 1) (RST+(EWC*16))*E-13 (RST+(EWC*16))*E (RST+(EWC*16))*E+13 ns 4E-13 4E 4E+13 ns (WS+WST+WH)*E-13 (WS+WST+WH)*E (WS+WST+WH)*E+13 ns (WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E - 13 (WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E (WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E + 13 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0) (WS)*E - 13 (WS)*E (WS)*E + 13 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1) -13 0 +13 ns Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0) (WH)*E-13 (WH)*E (WH)*E+13 ns Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1) -13 0 +13 ns 10 tw(EMOEL) 11 td(EMWAITH-EMOEH) Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high WRITES EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0) 15 tc(EMWCYCLE) 16 tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL) 17 th(EMWEH-EMCSH) 18 tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL) Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low (WS)*E-13 (WS)*E (WS)*E+13 ns 19 th(EMWEH-EMBAIV) Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid (WH)*E-13 (WH)*E (WH)*E+13 ns 20 tsu(EMAV-EMWEL) Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low (WS)*E-13 (WS)*E (WS)*E+13 ns 21 th(EMWEH-EMAIV) Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid (WH)*E-13 (WH)*E (WH)*E+13 ns (1) (2) (3) (4) 90 EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers. E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively. EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register. Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-15. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory(1)(2) Figure 5-21)(4) (continued) NO. (3) (see Figure 5-19 and CVDD = 1.05 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V PARAMETER MIN NOM UNIT MAX EM_WE active low width (EW = 0) (WST)*E-13 (WST)*E (WST)*E+13 ns EM_WE active low width (EW = 1) (WST+(EWC*16))*E-13 (WST+(EWC*16))*E (WST+(EWC*16))*E+13 ns 3E-13 4E 4E+13 ns Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low (WS)*E-13 (WS)*E (WS)*E+13 ns Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid (WH)*E-13 (WH)*E (WH)*E+13 ns 22 tw(EMWEL) 23 td(EMWAITH-EMWEH) Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high 24 tsu(EMDV-EMWEL) 25 th(EMWEH-EMDIV) Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 91 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.9.5 www.ti.com EMIF Electrical Data/Timing CVDD = 1.3 V, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V, External Loading = 10 pF Table 5-16. Timing Requirements for EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (see Figure 5-16 and Figure 517) CVDD = 1.3 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5 V NO. MIN MAX CVDD = 1.3 V DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V MIN UNIT MAX 19 tsu(DV-CLKH) Input setup time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] before EM_SDCLK rising 3.4 3.4 ns 20 th(CLKH-DIV) Input hold time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] after EM_SDCLK rising 1.2 1.2 ns (1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. Table 5-17. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF SDRAM/mSDRAM Interface (1) (2) (see Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17) NO. PARAMETER CVDD = 1.3 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5 V MIN 1 NOM MAX 10 (3) CVDD = 1.3 V DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V MIN NOM UNIT MAX 20 (4) tc(CLK) Cycle time, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK 2 tw(CLK) Pulse width, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK high or low 3 td(CLKH-CSV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EMA_CS[1:0] valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns 5 td(CLKH-DQMV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_DQM[1:0] valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns 7 td(CLKH-AV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_A[20:0] and EM_BA[1:0] valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns 9 td(CLKH-DV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_D[15:0] valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns 11 td(CLKH-RASV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDRAS valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns 13 td(CLKH-CASV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCAS valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns 15 td(CLKH-WEV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_WE valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns 21 td(CLKH-CKEV) Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCKE valid 1.1 7.77 1.1 7.77 ns (1) (2) (3) (4) 92 5 ns 10 ns Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 60 or 100 MHz, E = 16.67 or 10 ns, respectively. For more detail on the EM_SDCLK speed see Section 5.9.2, EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported. When CVDD = 1.3 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V, 2.75 V or 2.5 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 100 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 100 MHz). For more information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (literature number SPRUGU6). When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 50 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 50 MHz). For more information, see TMS320C5515/14/05/04 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) User's Guide (literature number SPRUGU6). Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-18. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2) (see Figure 5-18, Figure 5-20, and Figure 5-21) CVDD = 1.3 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V NO. MIN NOM UNIT MAX READS and WRITES 2 tw(EM_WAIT) Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion 2E ns 11 ns 0 ns (3) 4E + 7.5 ns tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase (3) 4E + 7.5 ns READS 12 tsu(EMDV-EMOEH) Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high 13 th(EMOEH-EMDIV) Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high 14 tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT) Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase WRITES 28 (1) (2) (3) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively. Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended wait states. Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-21 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 93 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-19. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory (1) (2) Figure 5-20, and Figure 5-21) NO. (3) (4) (see Figure 5-18, CVDD = 1.3 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V PARAMETER MIN UNIT NOM MAX READS and WRITES 1 td(TURNAROUND) Turn around time (TA)*E - 7.5 (TA)*E (TA)*E + 7.5 ns READS 3 tc(EMRCYCLE) EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0) (RS+RST+RH)*E - 7.5 (RS+RST+RH)*E (RS+RST+RH)*E + 7.5 ns EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1) (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 7.5 (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E + 7.5 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0) (RS)*E - 7.5 (RS)*E (RS)*E + 7.5 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1) -7.5 0 +7.5 ns Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0) (RH)*E - 7.5 (RH)*E (RH)*E + 7.5 ns Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CE[5:2] high (SS = 1) -7.5 0 +7.5 ns 4 tsu(EMCSL-EMOEL) 5 th(EMOEH-EMCSH) 6 tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL) Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low (RS)*E - 7.5 (RS)*E (RS)*E + 7.5 ns 7 th(EMOEH-EMBAIV) Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid (RH)*E - 7.5 (RH)*E (RH)*E + 7.5 ns 8 tsu(EMAV-EMOEL) Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low (RS)*E - 7.5 (RS)*E (RS)*E + 7.5 ns 9 th(EMOEH-EMAIV) Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid (RH)*E - 7.5 (RH)*E (RH)*E + 7.5 ns EM_OE active low width (EW = 0) (RST)*E - 7.5 (RST)*E (RST)*E + 7.5 ns EM_OE active low width (EW = 1) (RST+(EWC*16))*E - 7.5 (RST+(EWC*16))*E (RST+(EWC*16))*E + 7.5 ns 4E - 7.5 4E 4E + 7.5 ns EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0) (WS+WST+WH)*E - 7.5 (WS+WST+WH)*E (WS+WST+WH)*E + 7.5 ns EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1) (WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E 7.5 (WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E (WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E + 7.5 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0) (WS)*E - 7.5 (WS)*E (WS)*E +7. 5 ns Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1) -7.5 0 +7.5 ns Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0) (WH)*E - 7.5 (WH)*E (WH)*E + 7.5 ns Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1) -7.5 0 +7.5 ns 10 tw(EMOEL) 11 td(EMWAITH-EMOEH) Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high WRITES 15 tc(EMWCYCLE) 16 tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL) 17 th(EMWEH-EMCSH) 18 tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL) Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low (WS)*E - 7.5 (WS)*E (WS)*E + 7.5 ns 19 th(EMWEH-EMBAIV) Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid (WH)*E - 7.5 (WH)*E (WH)*E + 7.5 ns 20 tsu(EMAV-EMWEL) Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low (WS)*E - 7.5 (WS)*E (WS)*E + 7.5 ns 21 th(EMWEH-EMAIV) Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid (WH)*E - 7.5 (WH)*E (WH)*E + 7.5 ns (1) (2) (3) (4) 94 Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins. TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers. E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 100/120 MHz, E = 10/8.33 ns, respectively. EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register. Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-19. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory(1)(2) Figure 5-20, and Figure 5-21) (continued) NO. (3) (4) (see Figure 5-18, CVDD = 1.3 V DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/2.5/1.8 V PARAMETER MIN NOM UNIT MAX EM_WE active low width (EW = 0) (WST)*E - 7.5 (WST)*E (WST)*E + 7.5 ns EM_WE active low width (EW = 1) (WST+(EWC*16))*E - 7.5 (WST+(EWC*16))*E (WST+(EWC*16))*E + 7.5 ns 3E - 7.5 4E 4E + 7.5 ns Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low (WS)*E - 7.5 (WS)*E (WS)*E + 7.5 ns Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid (WH)*E - 7.5 (WH)*E (WH)*E + 7.5 ns 22 tw(EMWEL) 23 td(EMWAITH-EMWEH) Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high 24 tsu(EMDV-EMWEL) 25 th(EMWEH-EMDIV) BASIC mSDRAM WRITE OPERATION 1 2 2 EM_SDCLK 3 3 EM_CS[1:0] 5 5 EM_DQM[1:0] 7 7 7 7 EM_BA[1:0] EM_A[20:0] 9 9 EM_D[15:0] 11 11 EM_SDRAS 13 EM_SDCAS 15 15 EM_WE Figure 5-16. EMIF Basic SDRAM/mSDRAM Write Operation Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 95 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com BASIC mSDRAM READ OPERATION 1 2 2 EM_SDCLK 3 3 EM_CS[1:0] 5 5 EM_DQM[1:0] 7 7 7 7 EM_BA[1:0] EM_A[20:0] 19 17 2 EM_CLK Delay 20 17 EM_D[15:0] 11 11 EM_SDRAS 13 13 EM_SDCAS EM_WE Figure 5-17. EMIF Basic SDRAM/mSDRAM Read Operation 3 1 EM_CS[5:2] EM_BA[1:0] EM_A[20:0] 4 8 5 9 6 7 10 EM_OE 13 12 EM_D[15:0] EM_WE Figure 5-18. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIF 96 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 15 1 EM_CS[5:2] EM_BA[1:0] EM_A[20:0] 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 EM_WE 25 24 EM_D[15:0] EM_OE Figure 5-19. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIF EM_CS[5:2] SETUP STROBE Extended Due to EM_WAITx STROBE HOLD EM_BA[1:0] EM_A[20:0] EM_D[15:0] 14 11 EM_OE 2 EM_WAITx Asserted 2 Deasserted Figure 5-20. EM_WAITx Read Timing Requirements Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 97 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 EM_CS[5:2] SETUP www.ti.com STROBE Extended Due to EM_WAITx STROBE HOLD EM_BA[1:0] EM_A[20:0] EM_D[15:0] 28 25 EM_WE 2 EM_WAITx Asserted 2 Deasserted Figure 5-21. EM_WAITx Write Timing Requirements 98 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.10 Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) The device includes two MMC/SD controllers which are compliant with MMC V3.31, Secure Digital Part 1 Physical Layer Specification V2.0, and Secure Digital Input Output (SDIO) V3.3 specifications. The MMC/SD card controller supports these industry standards and assumes the reader is familiar with these standards. Each MMC/SD Controller in the device has the following features: • Multimedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) protocol support • Programmable clock frequency • 512 bit Read/Write FIFO to lower system overhead • Slave DMA transfer capability The MMC/SD card controller transfers data between the CPU and DMA controller on one side and MMC/SD card on the other side. The CPU and DMA controller can read/write the data in the card by accessing the registers in the MMC/SD controller. The MMC/SD controller on this device, does not support the SPI mode of operation. 5.10.1 MMC/SD Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-20 and Table 5-21 show the MMC/SD registers. The MMC/SD0 registers start at address 0x3A00 and the MMC/SD1 registers start at address 0x3B00. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 99 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-20. MMC/SD0 Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM 3A00h MMCCTL MMC Control Register 3A04h MMCCLK MMC Memory Clock Control Register 3A08h MMCST0 MMC Status Register 0 3A0Ch MMCST1 MMC Status Register 1 3A10h MMCIM 3A14h MMCTOR MMC Response Time-Out Register 3A18h MMCTOD MMC Data Read Time-Out Register 3A1Ch MMCBLEN MMC Block Length Register 3A20h MMCNBLK MMC Number of Blocks Register 3A24h MMCNBLC MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register 3A28h MMCDRR1 MMC Data Receive 1 Register 3A29h MMCDRR2 MMC Data Receive 2 Register 3A2Ch MMCDXR1 MMC Data Transmit 1 Register 3A2Dh MMCDXR2 MMC Data Transmit 2 Register 3A30h MMCCMD MMC Command Register 3A34h MMCARGHL MMC Argument Register 3A38h MMCRSP0 MMC Response Register 0 3A39h MMCRSP1 MMC Response Register 1 3A3Ch MMCRSP2 MMC Response Register 2 3A3Dh MMCRSP3 MMC Response Register 3 3A40h MMCRSP4 MMC Response Register 4 3A41h MMCRSP5 MMC Response Register 5 3A44h MMCRSP6 MMC Response Register 6 3A45h MMCRSP7 MMC Response Register 7 3A48h MMCDRSP MMC Data Response Register MMC Command Index Register 3A50h MMCCIDX 3A64h – 3A70h – 3A74h MMCFIFOCTL 100 REGISTER NAME MMC Interrupt Mask Register Reserved MMC FIFO Control Register Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-21. MMC/SD1 Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM REGISTER NAME 3B00h MMCCTL MMC Control Register 3B04h MMCCLK MMC Memory Clock Control Register 3B08h MMCST0 MMC Status Register 0 3B0Ch MMCST1 MMC Status Register 1 3B10h MMCIM 3B14h MMCTOR MMC Response Time-Out Register 3B18h MMCTOD MMC Data Read Time-Out Register 3B1Ch MMCBLEN MMC Block Length Register 3B20h MMCNBLK MMC Number of Blocks Register 3B24h MMCNBLC MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register 3B28h MMCDRR1 MMC Data Receive 1 Register 3B29h MMCDRR2 MMC Data Receive 2 Register 3B2Ch MMCDXR1 MMC Data Transmit 1 Register 3B2Dh MMCDXR2 MMC Data Transmit 2 Register 3B30h MMCCMD MMC Command Register 3B34h MMCARGHL MMC Argument Register 3B38h MMCRSP0 MMC Response Register 0 3B39h MMCRSP1 MMC Response Register 1 3B3Ch MMCRSP2 MMC Response Register 2 3B3Dh MMCRSP3 MMC Response Register 3 3B40h MMCRSP4 MMC Response Register 4 3B41h MMCRSP5 MMC Response Register 5 3B44h MMCRSP6 MMC Response Register 6 3B45h MMCRSP7 MMC Response Register 7 3B48h MMCDRSP MMC Data Response Register 3B50h MMCCIDX MMC Command Index Register 3B74h MMCFIFOCTL Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated MMC Interrupt Mask Register MMC FIFO Control Register Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 101 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.10.2 MMC/SD Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-22. Timing Requirements for MMC/SD (see Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-25) NO . CVDD = 1.3 V CVDD = 1.05 V FAST MODE STD MODE MIN MAX MIN UNIT MAX 1 tsu(CMDV-CLKH) Setup time, MMCx_CMD data input valid before MMCx_CLK high 3 3 ns 2 th(CLKH-CMDV) Hold time, MMCx_CMD data input valid after MMCx_CLK high 3 3 ns 3 tsu(DATV-CLKH) Setup time, MMC_Dx data input valid before MMCx_CLK high 3 3 ns 4 th(CLKH-DATV) Hold time, MMC_Dx data input valid after MMCx_CLK high 3 3 ns Table 5-23. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MMC Output (1) (see Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-25) NO . PARAMETER CVDD = 1.3 V CVDD = 1.05 V FAST MODE STD MODE UNIT MIN MAX MIN MAX 7 f(CLK) Operating frequency, MMCx_CLK 0 50 (2) 0 25 (2) MHz 8 f(CLK_ID) Identification mode frequency, MMCx_CLK 0 400 0 400 kHz 9 tw(CLKL) Pulse width, MMCx_CLK low 7 10 10 tw(CLKH) Pulse width, MMCx_CLK high 7 10 11 tr(CLK) Rise time, MMCx_CLK 12 tf(CLK) Fall time, MMCx_CLK 13 td(MDCLKL-CMDIV) Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_CMD data output invalid 14 td(MDCLKL-CMDV) Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_CMD data output valid 15 td(MDCLKL-DATIV) Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_Dx data output invalid td(MDCLKL-DATV) Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_Dx data output valid 16 (1) (2) ns ns 3 3 -4 3 ns 3 ns -4.1 ns 4 5.1 -4 -4.1 ns ns 4 5.1 ns For MMC/SD, the parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V and 2.75 V. Use this value or SYS_CLK/2 whichever is smaller. 7 9 10 MMCx_CLK 13 14 VALID MMCx_CMD Figure 5-22. MMC/SD Host Command Write Timing 9 10 7 MMCx_CLK 4 4 3 MMCx_Dx Start 3 D0 D1 Dx End Figure 5-23. MMC/SD Card Response Timing 102 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 9 7 10 MMCx_CLK 1 2 MMCx_CMD START XMIT Valid Valid Valid END Figure 5-24. MMC/SD Host Write Timing 7 9 10 MMCx_CLK 15 16 VALID MMCx_DAT Figure 5-25. MMC/SD Data Write Timing Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 103 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.11 Real-Time Clock (RTC) The device includes a Real-Time Clock (RTC) with its own separated power supply and isolation circuits. The separate supply and isolation circuits allow the RTC to run with the least possible power consumption, called RTC only mode. The RTC only mode requires CVDDRTC, LDOI, and DVDDRTC power domains to be powered, but other power domains can be shut off. See Section 5.11.1, RTC Only Mode for details. All RTC registers are preserved (except for RTC Control and RTC Update Registers) and the counter continues to operate when the device is powered off. The RTC also has the capability to wakeup the device from idle states via alarms, periodic interrupts, or an external WAKEUP input. Additionally, the RTC is able to output an alarm or periodic interrupt on the WAKEUP pin to cause external power management to re-enable power to the DSP Core and I/O. Note: The RTC Core (CVDDRTC) must be powered by an external power source even though RTC is not used. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC. The device RTC provides the following features: • 100-year calendar up to year 2099. • Counts seconds, minutes, hours, day of the week, date, month, and year with leap year compensation • Millisecond time correction • Binary-coded-decimal (BCD) representation of time, calendar, and alarm • 24-hour clock mode • Second, minute, hour, day, or week alarm interrupt • Periodic interrupt: every millisecond, second, minute, hour, or day • Alarm interrupt: precise time of day • Single interrupt to the DSP CPU • 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator with frequency calibration Control of the RTC is maintained through a set of I/O memory mapped registers (see Table 5-25). Note that any write to these registers will be synchronized to the RTC 32.768-KHz clock; thus, the CPU must run at least 3X faster than the RTC. Writes to these registers will not be evident until the next two 32.768KHz clock cycles later. Furthermore, if the RTC Oscillator is disabled, no RTC register can be written to. The RTC has its own power-on-reset (POR) circuit which resets the registers in the RTC core domain when power is first applied to the CVDDRTC power pin. The RTC flops are not reset by the device's RESET pin nor the digital core's POR (powergood signal). The scratch registers in the RTC can be used to take advantage of this unique reset domain to keep track of when the DSP boots and whether the RTC time registers have already been initialized to the current clock time or whether the software needs to go into a routine to prompt the user to set the time/date. 5.11.1 RTC Only Mode The maximum power saving can be achieved by using the RTC only mode. There are hardware and software requirements to use the RTC only mode. Hardware Requirements: • The DSP_LDO_EN pin must be tied to GND or pulled down to GND. • The RTC Core (CVDDRTC), RTC I/O (DVDDRTC), and LDO inputs (LDOI) must always be powered. • VDDA_ANA is recommended to be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin. If VDDA_ANA is powered externally, then it must always be powered. • All other power domains can be totally shut down during the RTC only mode. • A high pulse for a minimum of one RTC clock period (30.5 µs) to the WAKEUP pin is required to wake up the device from the RTC only mode. 104 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Power Down Sequence: 1. CPU must set the LDO_PD bit or the BG_PD bit in the RTCPMGT register (See Figure 5-26). Once the LDO_PD bit or the BG_PD bit is set to 1, the DSP_LDOO will be internally shut off and it will cause the internal POR holds the internal POWERGOOD signal low, which creates isolation for RTC. 2. All of the device power domains can be shut down except RTC Core (CVDDRTC), RTC I/O (DVDDRTC), and LDO inputs (LDOI). Wake-Up Sequence: 1. When waking up the device, all power domains must be turned back on before or upon applying a pulse to WAKEUP. 2. A pulse (≥ 30.5 µs) must be applied to the WAKEUP pin (active high). When the WAKEUP pin is asserted, the voltage on the DSP_LDOO pin will start ramping up at the positive level of WAKEUP and it is monitored by the internal POR. Until the voltage reaches to the threshold level, the internal POR will hold the internal POWERGOOD signal low, which provides isolation to RTC during transition period. Once the voltage reaches to the threshold level, the internal POR asserts the internal POWERGOOD signal (logic level high) and it resets reset of the system and disables RTC isolation and enables CPU to communicate with RTC. Figure 5-26. RTC Power Management Register (RTCPMGT) [1930h] 15 8 Reserved R-0 7 5 4 Reserved WU_DOUT R-0 R/W-1 3 2 WU_DIR BG_PD R/W-0 R/W-0 1 LDO_PD R/W-0 0 RTCCLKOUTEN R/W-0 LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset Table 5-24. RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions BIT NAME 15:5 RESERVED Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect. 4 WU_DOUT Wakeup output, active low/open-drain. 0 = WAKEUP pin driven low. 1 = WAKEUP pin is in high-impedance (Hi-Z). 3 2 WU_DIR BG_PD DESCRIPTION Wakeup pin direction control. 0 = WAKEUP pin configured as a input. 1 = WAKEUP pin configured as a output. Note: When the WAKEUP pin is configured as an input, it is active high. When the WAKEUP pin is configured as an output, is an open-drain that is active low and should be externally pulled-up via a 10-kΩ resistor to DVDDRTC. WU_DIR must be configured as an input to allow the WAKEUP pin to wake the device up from idle modes. Bandgap, on-chip LDOs, and the analog POR power down bit. This bit shuts down the on-chip LDOs (ANA_LDO, DSP_LDO, and USB_LDO), the Analog POR, and Bandgap reference. BG_PD and LDO_PD are only intended to be used when the internal LDOs supply power to the chip. If the internal LDOs are bypassed and not used then the BG_PD and LDO_PD power down mechanisms should not be used since POR gets powered down and the POWERGOOD signal is not generated properly. After this bit is asserted, the on-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and the Bandgap reference can be reenabled by the WAKEUP pin (high) or the RTC alarm interrupt. The Bandgap circuit will take about 100 msec to charge the external 0.1 uF capacitor via the internal 326-kΩ resistor. 0 = On-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and Bandgap reference are enabled. 1 = On-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and Bandgap reference are disabled (shutdown). Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 105 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-24. RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions (continued) BIT 1 NAME LDO_PD DESCRIPTION On-chip LDOs and Analog POR power down bit. This bit shuts down the on-chip LDOs (ANA_LDO, DSP_LDO, and USB_LDO) and the Analog POR. BG_PD and LDO_PD are only intended to be used when the internal LDOs supply power to the chip. If the internal LDOs are bypassed and not used then the BG_PD and LDO_PD power down mechanisms should not be used since POR gets powered down and the POWERGOOD signal is not generated properly. After this bit is asserted, the on-chip LDOs and Analog POR can be re-enabled by the WAKEUP pin (high) or the RTC alarm interrupt. This bit keeps the Bandgap reference turned on to allow a faster wake-up time with the expense power consumption of the Bandgap reference. 0 = On-chip LDOs and Analog POR are enabled. 1 = On-chip LDOs and Analog POR are disabled (shutdown). 0 106 RTCCLKOUTEN Clockout output enable bit. 0 = Clock output disabled. 1 = Clock output enabled. Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.11.2 RTC Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-25 shows the RTC registers. Table 5-25. Real-Time Clock (RTC) Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM 1900h RTCINTEN 1901h RTCUPDATE RTC Update Register 1904h RTCMIL Milliseconds Register 1905h RTCMILA Milliseconds Alarm Register 1908h RTCSEC Seconds Register 1909h RTCSECA 190Ch RTCMIN 190Dh RTCMINA Minutes Alarm Register 1910h RTCHOUR Hours Register 1911h RTCHOURA 1914h RTCDAY 1915h RTCDAYA 1918h RTCMONTH 1919h RTCMONTHA REGISTER NAME RTC Interrupt Enable Register Seconds Alarm Register Minutes Register Hours Alarm Register Days Register Days Alarm Register Months Register Months Alarm Register 191Ch RTCYEAR 191Dh RTCYEARA Years Register 1920h RTCINTFL 1921h RTCNOPWR RTC Lost Power Status Register 1924h RTCINTREG RTC Interrupt Register 1928h RTCDRIFT 192Ch RTCOSC 1930h RTCPMGT RTC Power Management Register 1960h RTCSCR1 RTC LSW Scratch Register 1 1961h RTCSCR2 RTC MSW Scratch Register 2 1964h RTCSCR3 RTC LSW Scratch Register 3 1965h RTCSCR4 RTC MSW Scratch Register 4 Years Alarm Register RTC Interrupt Flag Register RTC Compensation Register RTC Oscillator Register 5.11.2.1 RTC Electrical Data/Timing For more detailed information on RTC electrical timings, specifically WAKEUP, see the Section 5.7.3, Reset Electrical Data/Timing. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 107 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.12 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between the device and other devices compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus™) specification version 2.1. External components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive 2 to 8-bit data to/from the DSP through the I2C module. The I2C port does not support CBUS compatible devices. The I2C port supports the following features: • Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000) • Data Transfer Rate from 10 kbps to 400 kbps (Philips Fast-Mode Rate) • Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or Less • Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes • Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality • One Read DMA Event and One Write DMA Event, which can be used by the DMA Controller • One Interrupt that can be used by the CPU • Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers The I2C module clock must be in the range from 6.7 MHz to 13.3 MHz. This is necessary for proper operation of the I2C module. With the I2C module clock in this range, the noise filters on the SDA and SCL pins suppress noise that has a duration of 50 ns or shorter. The I2C module clock is derived from the DSP clock divided by a programmable prescaler. 108 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com 5.12.1 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 I2C Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-26 shows the Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) registers. Table 5-26. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM 1A00h ICOAR I2C Own Address Register 1A04h ICIMR I2C Interrupt Mask Register 1A08h ICSTR I2C Interrupt Status Register 1A0Ch ICCLKL I2C Clock Low-Time Divider Register 1A10h ICCLKH I2C Clock High-Time Divider Register 1A14h ICCNT I2C Data Count Register 1A18h ICDRR I2C Data Receive Register 1A1Ch ICSAR I2C Slave Address Register 1A20h ICDXR I2C Data Transmit Register 1A24h ICMDR I2C Mode Register 1A28h ICIVR I2C Interrupt Vector Register 1A2Ch ICEMDR I2C Extended Mode Register 1A30h ICPSC I2C Prescaler Register 1A34h ICPID1 I2C Peripheral Identification Register 1 1A38h ICPID2 I2C Peripheral Identification Register 2 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated REGISTER NAME Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 109 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.12.2 www.ti.com I2C Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-27. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings (1) (see Figure 5-27) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. STANDARD MODE MIN 1 2.5 µs 2 tsu(SCLH-SDAL) Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START condition) 4.7 0.6 µs 3 th(SCLL-SDAL) Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated START condition) 4 0.6 µs 4 tw(SCLL) Pulse duration, SCL low 4.7 1.3 µs 5 tw(SCLH) Pulse duration, SCL high 4 0.6 µs 6 tsu(SDAV-SCLH) Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high 250 100 (2) 7 th(SDA-SCLL) Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low 0 (3) 0 (3) 8 tw(SDAH) Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START conditions 4.7 (5) Rise time, SDA tr(SCL) Rise time, SCL (5) (5) tf(SDA) Fall time, SDA 12 tf(SCL) Fall time, SCL (5) 13 tsu(SCLH-SDAH) Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition) 14 tw(SP) Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed) 15 Cb (6) Capacitive load for each bus line (6) ns 0.9 (4) 1.3 µs µs (6) 300 ns 1000 20 + 0.1Cb (6) 300 ns (6) 300 ns 300 20 + 0.1Cb (6) 300 1000 20 + 0.1Cb 11 (4) (5) MAX 10 tr(SDA) (3) MIN Cycle time, SCL 9 (2) MAX tc(SCL) 10 (1) UNIT FAST MODE 300 20 + 0.1Cb 4 0.6 ns µs 0 400 50 ns 400 pF The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered down. Also these pins are not 3.6 V-tolerant (their VIH cannot go above DVDDIO + 0.3 V). A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)≥ 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released. A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the undefined region of the falling edge of SCL. The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal. The rise/fall times are measured at 30% and 70% of DVDDIO. The fall time is only slightly influenced by the external bus load (Cb) and external pullup resistor. However, the rise time (tr) is mainly determined by the bus load capacitance and the value of the pullup resistor. The pullup resistor must be selected to meet the I2C rise and fall time values specified. Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed. 11 9 SDA 6 8 14 4 13 5 10 SCL 1 12 3 2 7 3 Stop Start Repeated Start Stop Figure 5-27. I2C Receive Timings 110 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-28. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings (1) (see Figure 5-28) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. PARAMETER STANDARD MODE MIN (1) (2) UNIT FAST MODE MAX MIN MAX 16 tc(SCL) Cycle time, SCL 10 2.5 µs 17 td(SCLH-SDAL) Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START condition) 4.7 0.6 µs 18 td(SDAL-SCLL) Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a repeated START condition) 4 0.6 µs 19 tw(SCLL) Pulse duration, SCL low 4.7 1.3 µs 20 tw(SCLH) Pulse duration, SCL high 4 0.6 µs 21 td(SDAV-SCLH) Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high 250 100 ns 22 tv(SCLL-SDAV) Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low 0 0 23 tw(SDAH) Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START conditions 4.7 1.3 24 tr(SDA) Rise time, SDA (2) 1000 20 + 0.1Cb (1) 300 ns 25 tr(SCL) Rise time, SCL (2) (1) 300 ns 26 tf(SDA) Fall time, SDA (2) 300 20 + 0.1Cb (1) 300 ns 27 tf(SCL) Fall time, SCL (2) 300 20 + 0.1Cb (1) 300 ns 28 td(SCLH-SDAH) Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition) 29 Cp Capacitance for each I2C pin 10 pF 1000 20 + 0.1Cb 4 0.9 µs 0.6 10 µs µs Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed. The rise/fall times are measured at 30% and 70% of DVDDIO. The fall time is only slightly influenced by the external bus load (Cb) and external pullup resistor. However, the rise time (tr) is mainly determined by the bus load capacitance and the value of the pullup resistor. The pullup resistor must be selected to meet the I2C rise and fall time values specified. 26 24 SDA 21 23 19 28 20 25 SCL 16 27 18 17 22 18 Stop Start Repeated Start Stop Figure 5-28. I2C Transmit Timings Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 111 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.13 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) The UART performs serial-to-parallel conversions on data received from an external peripheral device and parallel-to-serial conversions on data transmitted to an external peripheral device via a serial bus. The device has one UART peripheral with the following features: • Programmable baud rates (frequency pre-scale values from 1 to 65535) • Fully programmable serial interface characteristics: – 5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters – Even, odd, or no PARITY bit generation and detection – 1, 1.5, or 2 STOP bit generation • 16-byte depth transmitter and receiver FIFOs: – The UART can be operated with or without the FIFOs – 1, 4, 8, or 14 byte selectable receiver FIFO trigger level for autoflow control and DMA • DMA signaling capability for both received and transmitted data • CPU interrupt capability for both received and transmitted data • False START bit detection • Line break generation and detection • Internal diagnostic capabilities: – Loopback controls for communications link fault isolation – Break, parity, overrun, and framing error simulation • Programmable autoflow control using CTS and RTS signals 5.13.1 UART Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-29 shows the UART registers. Table 5-29. UART Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM 1B00h RBR Receiver Buffer Register (read only) 1B00h THR Transmitter Holding Register (write only) 1B02h IER Interrupt Enable Register 1B04h IIR Interrupt Identification Register (read only) 1B04h FCR FIFO Control Register (write only) 1B06h LCR Line Control Register 1B08h MCR Modem Control Register 112 REGISTER NAME 1B0Ah LSR Line Status Register 1B0Ch MSR Modem Status Register 1B0Eh SCR Scratch Register 1B10h DLL Divisor LSB Latch 1B12h DLH Divisor MSB Latch 1B18h PWREMU_MGMT Power and Emulation Management Register Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.13.2 UART Electrical Data/Timing [Receive/Transmit] Table 5-30. Timing Requirements for UART Receive (1) (2) (see Figure 5-29) CVDD = 1.05 V NO. CVDD = 1.3 V MIN MAX MIN MAX UNIT 4 tw(URXDB) Pulse duration, receive data bit (UART_RXD) [15/30/100 pF] U - 3.5 U+3 U - 3.5 U+3 ns 5 tw(URXSB) Pulse duration, receive start bit [15/30/100 pF] U - 3.5 U+3 U - 3.5 U+3 ns (1) (2) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate. These parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 2.5 V Table 5-31. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UART Transmit (1) (see Figure 5-29) NO. (1) (2) CVDD = 1.05 V PARAMETER MIN MAX 1 f(baud) Maximum programmable bit rate 2 tw(UTXDB) Pulse duration, transmit data bit (UART_TXD) [15/30/100 pF] U - 3.5 U+4 3 tw(UTXSB) Pulse duration, transmit start bit [15/30/100 pF] U - 3.5 U+4 CVDD = 1.3V MIN 3.75 MAX (2) UNIT 6.25 MHz U - 3.5 U+4 ns U - 3.5 U+4 ns U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate. These parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 2.5 V 3 2 UART_TXD Start Bit Data Bits 5 4 UART_RXD Start Bit Data Bits Figure 5-29. UART Transmit/Receive Timing Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 113 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.14 Inter-IC Sound (I2S) The device I2S peripherals allow serial transfer of full-duplex streaming data, usually audio data, between the device and an external I2S peripheral device such as an audio codec. The device supports 4 independent dual-channel I2S peripherals, each with the following features: • Full-duplex (transmit and receive) dual-channel communication • Double buffered data registers that allow for continuous data streaming • I2S/Left-justified and DSP data format with a data delay of 1 or 2 bits • Data word-lengths of 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24, or 32 bits • Ability to sign-extend received data samples for easy use in signal processing algorithms • Programmable polarity for both frame synchronization and bit clocks • Stereo (in I2S/Left-justified or DSP data formats) or mono (in DSP data format) mode • Detection of over-run, under-run, and frame-sync error conditions 5.14.1 I2S Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-32 through Table 5-35 show the I2S0 through I2S3 registers. Table 5-32. I2S0 Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM REGISTER NAME 2800h I2S0SCTRL I2S0 Serializer Control Register 2804h I2S0SRATE I2S0 Sample Rate Generator Register 2808h I2S0TXLT0 I2S0 Transmit Left Data 0 Register 2809h I2S0TXLT1 I2S0 Transmit Left Data 1 Register 280Ch I2S0TXRT0 I2S0 Transmit Right Data 0 Register 280Dh I2S0TXRT1 I2S0 Transmit Right Data 1 Register 2810h I2S0INTFL I2S0 Interrupt Flag Register 2814h I2S0INTMASK I2S0 Interrupt Mask Register 2828h I2S0RXLT0 I2S0 Receive Left Data 0 Register 2829h I2S0RXLT1 I2S0 Receive Left Data 1 Register 282Ch I2S0RXRT0 I2S0 Receive Right Data 0 Register 282Dh I2S0RXRT1 I2S0 Receive Right Data 1 Register Table 5-33. I2S1 Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE 114 ACRONYM REGISTER NAME 2900h I2S1SCTRL I2S1 Serializer Control Register 2904h I2S1SRATE I2S1 Sample Rate Generator Register 2908h I2S1TXLT0 I2S1 Transmit Left Data 0 Register 2909h I2S1TXLT1 I2S1 Transmit Left Data 1 Register 290Ch I2S1TXRT0 I2S1 Transmit Right Data 0 Register 290Dh I2S1TXRT1 I2S1 Transmit Right Data 1 Register 2910h I2S1INTFL I2S1 Interrupt Flag Register 2914h I2S1INTMASK I2S1 Interrupt Mask Register 2928h I2S1RXLT0 I2S1 Receive Left Data 0 Register 2929h I2S1RXLT1 I2S1 Receive Left Data 1 Register 292Ch I2S1RXRT0 I2S1 Receive Right Data 0 Register 292Dh I2S1RXRT1 I2S1 Receive Right Data 1 Register Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-34. I2S2 Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM REGISTER NAME 2A00h I2S2SCTRL I2S2 Serializer Control Register 2A04h I2S2SRATE I2S2 Sample Rate Generator Register 2A08h I2S2TXLT0 I2S2 Transmit Left Data 0 Register 2A09h I2S2TXLT1 I2S2 Transmit Left Data 1 Register 2A0Ch I2S2TXRT0 I2S2 Transmit Right Data 0 Register 2A0Dh I2S2TXRT1 I2S2 Transmit Right Data 1 Register 2A10h I2S2INTFL I2S2 Interrupt Flag Register 2A14h I2S2INTMASK I2S2 Interrupt Mask Register 2A28h I2S2RXLT0 I2S2 Receive Left Data 0 Register 2A29h I2S2RXLT1 I2S2 Receive Left Data 1 Register 2A2Ch I2S2RXRT0 I2S2 Receive Right Data 0 Register 2A2Dh I2S2RXRT1 I2S2 Receive Right Data 1 Register Table 5-35. I2S3 Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM REGISTER NAME 2B00h I2S3SCTRL I2S3 Serializer Control Register 2B04h I2S3SRATE I2S3 Sample Rate Generator Register 2B08h I2S3TXLT0 I2S3 Transmit Left Data 0 Register 2B09h I2S3TXLT1 I2S3 Transmit Left Data 1 Register 2B0Ch I2S3TXRT0 I2S3 Transmit Right Data 0 Register 2B0Dh I2S3TXRT1 I2S3 Transmit Right Data 1 Register 2B10h I2S3INTFL I2S3 Interrupt Flag Register 2B14h I2S3INTMASK I2S3 Interrupt Mask Register 2B28h I2S3RXLT0 I2S3 Receive Left Data 0 Register 2B29h I2S3RXLT1 I2S3 Receive Left Data 1 Register 2B2Ch I2S3RXRT0 I2S3 Receive Right Data 0 Register 2B2Dh I2S3RXRT1 I2S3 Receive Right Data 1 Register Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 115 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.14.2 I2S Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-36. Timing Requirements for I2S [I/O = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 2.5 V] (1) (see Figure 5-30) MASTER NO. CVDD = 1.05 V MIN 40 or 2P (1) (2) MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX (1) (2) ns 2 tw(CLKH) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high 20 20 20 20 ns 3 tw(CLKL) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low 20 20 20 20 ns tsu(RXV-CLKH) Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) 5 5 5 5 ns tsu(RXV-CLKL) Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) 5 5 5 5 ns th(CLKH-RXV) Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) 3 3 3 3 ns th(CLKL-RXV) Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) 3 3 3 3 ns tsu(FSV-CLKH) Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) – – 15 15 ns tsu(FSV-CLKL) Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) – – 15 15 ns th(CLKH-FSV) Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) – – tw(CLKH) + 0.6 (3) tw(CLKH) + 0.6 (3) ns th(CLKL-FSV) Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) – – tw(CLKL) + 0.6 (3) tw(CLKL) + 0.6 (3) ns 10 40 or 2P UNIT Cycle time, I2S_CLK 9 40 or 2P (1) (2) CVDD = 1.3 V tc(CLK) 8 116 MIN 40 or 2P (1) (2) CVDD = 1.05 V 1 7 (1) (2) (3) MAX SLAVE CVDD = 1.3 V P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. Use whichever value is greater. In Slave Mode, I2S_FS is required to be latched on both edges of I2S input clock (I2S_CLK). Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-37. Timing Requirements for I2S [I/O = 1.8 V] (1) (see Figure 5-30) MASTER NO. CVDD = 1.05 V MIN MAX MIN 50 or 2P (1) 40 or 2P (1) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high 25 20 tw(CLKL) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low 25 tsu(RXV-CLKH) Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) tsu(RXV-CLKL) MAX CVDD = 1.05 V MIN 20 ns 20 25 20 ns 5 5 5 5 ns Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) 5 5 5 5 ns th(CLKH-RXV) Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) 3 3 3 3 ns th(CLKL-RXV) Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) 3 3 3 3 ns tsu(FSV-CLKH) Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) – – 15 15 ns tsu(FSV-CLKL) Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) – – 15 15 ns th(CLKH-FSV) Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) – – tw(CLKH) + 0.6 (3) tw(CLKH) + 0.6 (3) ns th(CLKL-FSV) Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) – – tw(CLKL) + 0.6 (3) tw(CLKL) + 0.6 (3) ns 2 tw(CLKH) 3 8 9 10 (2) (2) 40 or 2P (1) UNIT MAX 25 Cycle time, I2S_CLK (2) MIN ns tc(CLK) 50 or 2P (1) CVDD = 1.3 V MAX (2) 1 7 (1) (2) (3) SLAVE CVDD = 1.3 V P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. Use whichever value is greater. In Slave Mode, I2S_FS is required to be latched on both edges of I2S input clock (I2S_CLK). Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 117 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-38. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2S Output [I/O = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, or 2.5 V] (see Figure 5-30) MASTER NO. 1 2 3 4 5 (1) (2) 118 PARAMETER SLAVE CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V MIN MIN MIN MIN MAX MAX MAX UNIT MAX 40 or 2P (1) (2) 40 or 2P (1) (2) 40 or 2P (1) (2) 40 or 2P (1) (2) ns Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) 20 20 20 20 ns Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) 20 20 20 20 ns tw(CLKL) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 0) 20 20 20 20 ns tw(CLKH) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 1) 20 tdmax(CLKL-DXV) Output Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 0) 0 15 0 14 0 15 0 15 ns tdmax(CLKH-DXV) Output Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 1) 0 15 0 14 0 15 0 15 ns tdmax(CLKL-FSV) Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 0) -1.1 14 -1.1 14 – – ns tdmax(CLKH-FSV) Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 1) -1.1 14 -1.1 14 – – ns tc(CLK) Cycle time, I2S_CLK tw(CLKH) tw(CLKL) 20 20 20 ns P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. Use whichever value is greater. Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-39. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2S Output [I/O = 1.8 V] (see Figure 5-30) MASTER NO. 1 2 3 4 5 (1) (2) PARAMETER SLAVE CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V MIN MIN MIN MIN MAX MAX MAX UNIT MAX 50 or 2P (1) (2) 40 or 2P (1) (2) 50 or 2P (1) (2) 40 or 2P (1) (2) ns Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0) 25 20 25 20 ns Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1) 25 20 25 20 ns tw(CLKL) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 0) 25 20 25 20 ns tw(CLKH) Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 1) 25 tdmax(CLKL-DXV) Output Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 0) 0 19 0 14 0 19 0 16.5 ns tdmax(CLKH-DXV) Output Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 1) 0 19 0 14 0 19 0 16.5 ns tdmax(CLKL-FSV) Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 0) -1.1 14 -1.1 14 – – ns tdmax(CLKH-FSV) Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 1) -1.1 14 -1.1 14 – – ns tc(CLK) Cycle time, I2S_CLK tw(CLKH) tw(CLKL) 20 25 20 ns P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. Use whichever value is greater. Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 119 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 1 3 2 I2S_CLK (CLKPOL = 0) I2S_CLK (CLKPOL = 1) 5 I2S_FS (Output, MODE = 1) 9 10 7 8 I2S_FS (Input, MODE = 0) 4 I2S_DX I2S_RX Figure 5-30. I2S Input and Output Timings 120 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.15 Serial Port Interface (SPI) The device serial port interface (SPI) is a high-speed synchronous serial input/output port that allows a serial bit stream of programmed length (1 to 32 bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a programmed bit-transfer rate. The SPI supports multi-chip operation of up to four SPI slave devices. The SPI can operate as a master device only, slave mode is not supported. Note: The SPI is not supported by the device DMA controller, so DMA cannot be used in transferring data between the SPI and the on-chip RAM. The SPI is normally used for communication between the DSP and external peripherals. Typical applications include an interface to external I/O or peripheral expansion via devices such as shift registers, display drivers, SPI EEPROMs, and analog-to-digital converters. The SPI has the following features: • Programmable divider for serial data clock generation • Four pin interface (SPI_CLK, SPI_CSn, SPI_RX, and SPI_TX) • Programmable data length (1 to 32 bits) • 4 external chip select signals • Programmable transfer or frame size (1 to 4096 characters) • Optional interrupt generation on character completion • Programmable SPI_CSn to SPI_TX delay from 0 to 3 SPI_CLK cycles • Programmable signal polarities • Programmable active clock edge • Internal loopback mode for testing 5.15.1 SPI Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-40 shows the SPI registers. Table 5-40. SPI Module Registers CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM 3000h SPICDR Clock Divider Register 3001h SPICCR Clock Control Register 3002h SPIDCR1 Device Configuration Register 1 3003h SPIDCR2 Device Configuration Register 2 3004h SPICMD1 Command Register 1 3005h SPICMD2 Command Register 2 3006h SPISTAT1 Status Register 1 3007h SPISTAT2 Status Register 2 3008h SPIDAT1 Data Register 1 3009h SPIDAT2 Data Register 2 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated REGISTER NAME Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 121 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.15.2 SPI Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-41. Timing Requirements for SPI Inputs (see Figure 5-31 through Figure 5-34) CVDD = 1.05 V NO. MIN 4 tC(SCLK) Cycle time, SPI_CLK 5 tw(SCLKH) Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high 6 tw(SCLKL) Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low 7 tsu(SRXV-SCLK) 8 (1) (2) th(SCLK-SRXV) CVDD = 1.3 V MAX MIN MAX UNIT 66.4 or 4P (1) (2) 40 or 4P (1) (2) ns 30 19 ns 30 19 ns Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 0 16.1 13.9 ns Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK low, SPI Mode 1 16.1 13.9 ns Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 2 16.1 13.9 ns Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 3 16.1 13.9 ns Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 0 0 0 ns Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK low, SPI Mode 1 0 0 ns Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK low, SPI Mode 2 0 0 ns Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK high, SPI Mode 3 0 0 ns P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. Use whichever value is greater. Table 5-42. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Outputs (see Figure 5-31 through Figure 5-34) NO. 1 2 3 (1) CVDD = 1.05 V PARAMETER td(SCLK-STXV) CVDD = 1.3 V UNIT MIN MAX MIN MAX Delay time, SPI_CLK low to SPI_TX valid, SPI Mode 0 -4.2 8.9 -4.9 5.3 ns Delay time, SPI_CLK high to SPI_TX valid, SPI Mode 1 -4.2 8.9 -4.9 5.3 ns Delay time, SPI_CLK high to SPI_TX valid, SPI Mode 2 -4.2 8.9 -4.9 5.3 ns Delay time, SPI_CLK low to SPI_TX valid, SPI Mode 3 -4.2 8.9 -4.9 5.3 ns tC - 8 + D (1) ns td(SPICS-SCLK) Delay time, SPI_CS active to SPI_CLK active toh(SCLKI-SPICSI) Output hold time, SPI_CS inactive to SPI_CLK inactive tC - 8 + D (1) 0.5tC - 2.2 0.5tC - 2.2 ns D is the programable data delay in ns. Data delay can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 SPICLK clock cycles. 4 6 5 SPI_CLK 1 SPI_TX B0 SPI_RX B0 2 B1 B1 7 Bn-2 Bn-1 Bn-2 Bn-1 8 3 SPI_CS A. B. Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown. Figure 5-31. SPI Mode 0 Transfer (CKPn = 0, CKPHn = 0) 122 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 4 6 5 SPI_CLK 1 B0 SPI_TX B1 SPI_RX 7 2 B1 Bn-2 Bn-1 B1 Bn-2 Bn-1 8 3 SPI_CS A. B. Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown. Figure 5-32. SPI Mode 1 Transfer (CKPn = 0, CKPHn = 1) 4 5 6 SPI_CLK 1 SPI_TX SPI_RX B0 B1 B0 B1 Bn-2 Bn-1 Bn-2 7 2 Bn-1 3 8 SPI_CS A. B. Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown. Figure 5-33. SPI Mode 2 Transfer (CKPn = 1, CKPHn = 0) 4 5 6 SPI_CLK 1 B0 SPI_TX B0 SPI_RX SPI_CS A. B. 2 7 B1 Bn-2 Bn-1 B1 Bn-2 Bn-1 8 3 Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown. Figure 5-34. SPI Mode 3 Transfer (CKPn = 1, CKPHn = 1) Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 123 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.16 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 Controller The device USB2.0 peripheral supports the following features: • USB2.0 peripheral at speeds high-speed (480 Mb/s) and full-speed (12 Mb/s) • All transfer modes (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous asynchronous mode) • 4 Transmit (TX) and 4 Receive (RX) Endpoints in addition to Control Endpoint 0 • FIFO RAM – 4K endpoint – Programmable size • Integrated USB2.0 High Speed PHY • RNDIS mode for accelerating RNDIS type protocols using short packet termination over USB The USB2.0 peripheral on this device, does not support: • Host Mode (Peripheral/Device Modes supported only) • On-Chip Charge Pump • On-the-Go (OTG) Mode 124 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.16.1 USB2.0 Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-43 lists of the USB2.0 peripheral registers. Table 5-43. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers (1) (1) CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM 8000h REVID1 Revision Identification Register 1 8001h REVID2 Revision Identification Register 2 8004h CTRLR Control Register 8008h STATR Status Register 800Ch EMUR Emulation Register 8010h MODER1 Mode Register 1 8011h MODER2 Mode Register 2 8014h AUTOREQ 8018h SRPFIXTIME1 SRP Fix Time Register 1 8019h SRPFIXTIME2 SRP Fix Time Register 2 801Ch TEARDOWN1 Teardown Register 1 801Dh TEARDOWN2 Teardown Register 2 8020h INTSRCR1 USB Interrupt Source Register 1 8021h INTSRCR2 USB Interrupt Source Register 2 8024h INTSETR1 USB Interrupt Source Set Register 1 8025h INTSETR2 USB Interrupt Source Set Register 2 8028h INTCLRR1 USB Interrupt Source Clear Register 1 8029h INTCLRR2 USB Interrupt Source Clear Register 2 802Ch INTMSKR1 USB Interrupt Mask Register 1 802Dh INTMSKR2 USB Interrupt Mask Register 2 8030h INTMSKSETR1 USB Interrupt Mask Set Register 1 8031h INTMSKSETR2 USB Interrupt Mask Set Register 2 8034h INTMSKCLRR1 USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register 1 8035h INTMSKCLRR2 USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register 2 8038h INTMASKEDR1 USB Interrupt Source Masked Register 1 8039h INTMASKEDR2 USB Interrupt Source Masked Register 2 803Ch EOIR 8040h INTVECTR1 USB Interrupt Vector Register 1 8041h INTVECTR2 USB Interrupt Vector Register 2 8050h GREP1SZR1 Generic RNDIS EP1Size Register 1 8051h GREP1SZR2 Generic RNDIS EP1Size Register 2 8054h GREP2SZR1 Generic RNDIS EP2 Size Register 1 8055h GREP2SZR2 Generic RNDIS EP2 Size Register 2 8058h GREP3SZR1 Generic RNDIS EP3 Size Register 1 REGISTER DESCRIPTION Auto Request Register USB End of Interrupt Register 8059h GREP3SZR2 Generic RNDIS EP3 Size Register 2 805Ch GREP4SZR1 Generic RNDIS EP4 Size Register 1 805Dh GREP4SZR2 Generic RNDIS EP4 Size Register 2 Before reading or writing to the USB registers, be sure to set the BYTEMODE bits to "00b" in the USB system control register to enable word accesses to the USB registers . Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 125 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-43. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued) CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM 8401h FADDR_POWER 8402h INTRTX Interrupt Register for Endpoint 0 plus Transmit Endpoints 1 to 4 8405h INTRRX Interrupt Register for Receive Endpoints 1 to 4 8406h INTRTXE Interrupt enable register for INTRTX 8409h INTRRXE Interrupt Enable Register for INTRRX 840Ah INTRUSB_INTRUSBE 840Dh FRAME REGISTER DESCRIPTION Common USB Registers 840Eh Function Address Register, Power Management Register Interrupt Register for Common USB Interrupts, Interrupt Enable Register Frame Number Register INDEX_TESTMODE Index Register for Selecting the Endpoint Status and Control Registers, Register to Enable the USB 2.0 Test Modes TXMAXP_INDX Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4) USB Indexed Registers 8411h 8412h PERI_CSR0_INDX PERI_TXCSR_INDX 8415h 8416h 8419h RXMAXP_INDX Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Peripheral Mode. (Index register set to select Endpoint 0) Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4) Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4) PERI_RXCSR_INDX Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4) COUNT0_INDX Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO. (Index register set to select Endpoint 0) RXCOUNT_INDX Number of Bytes in Host Receive Endpoint FIFO. (Index register set to select Endpoints 1- 4) 841Ah - Reserved 841Dh - Reserved 841Eh CONFIGDATA_INDC (Upper byte of 841Eh) 8421h FIFO0R1 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 0 8422h FIFO0R2 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 0 8425h FIFO1R1 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 1 8426h FIFO1R2 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 1 8429h FIFO2R1 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 2 Returns details of core configuration. (index register set to select Endpoint 0) USB FIFO Registers 842Ah FIFO2R2 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 2 842Dh FIFO3R1 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 3 842Eh FIFO3R2 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 3 8431h FIFO4R1 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 4 8432h FIFO4R2 Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 4 Dynamic FIFO Control Registers 8461h 8462h 126 TXFIFOSZ_RXFIFOSZ Reserved Transmit Endpoint FIFO Size, Receive Endpoint FIFO Size (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4) 8465h TXFIFOADDR Transmit Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4) 8466h RXFIFOADDR Receive Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4) 846Dh - Reserved Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-43. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued) CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM 8501h - 8502h PERI_CSR0 8505h - Reserved 8506h - Reserved 8509h COUNT0 REGISTER DESCRIPTION Control and Status Register for Endpoint 0 Reserved Control Status Register for Peripheral Endpoint 0 Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO 850Ah - Reserved 850Dh - Reserved 850Eh CONFIGDATA (Upper byte of 850Eh) 8511h TXMAXP 8512h PERI_TXCSR Returns details of core configuration. Control and Status Register for Endpoint 1 Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode) 8515h RXMAXP 8516h PERI_RXCSR Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint 8519h RXCOUNT 851Ah - Reserved 851Dh - Reserved 851Eh - Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode) Number of Bytes in the Receiving Endpoint's FIFO Reserved Control and Status Register for Endpoint 2 8521h TXMAXP 8522h PERI_TXCSR Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint 8525h RXMAXP 8526h PERI_RXCSR 8529h RXCOUNT 852Ah - Reserved 852Dh - Reserved 852Eh - Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode) Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode) Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO Reserved Control and Status Register for Endpoint 3 8531h TXMAXP 8532h PERI_TXCSR 8535h RXMAXP 8536h PERI_RXCSR Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode) Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode) 8539h RXCOUNT 853Ah - Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO Reserved 853Dh - Reserved 853Eh - Reserved 8541h TXMAXP 8542h PERI_TXCSR Control and Status Register for Endpoint 4 8545h RXMAXP 8546h PERI_RXCSR 8549h RXCOUNT Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Transmit Endpoint Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode) Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral/Host Receive Endpoint Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode) Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO 854Ah - Reserved 854Dh - Reserved 854Eh - Reserved Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 127 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-43. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued) CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM 9000h - Reserved 9001h - Reserved REGISTER DESCRIPTION CPPI DMA (CMDA) Registers 9004h TDFDQ 9008h DMAEMU CDMA Teardown Free Descriptor Queue Control Register 9800h TXGCR1[0] Transmit Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 1 9801h TXGCR2[0] Transmit Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 2 9808h RXGCR1[0] Receive Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 1 9809h RXGCR2[0] Receive Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 2 980Ch RXHPCR1A[0] Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A 980Dh RXHPCR2A[0] Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A 9810h RXHPCR1B[0] Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B 9811h RXHPCR2B[0] Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B 9820h TXGCR1[1] Transmit Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 1 9821h TXGCR2[1] Transmit Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 2 9828h RXGCR1[1] Receive Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 1 Receive Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 2 CDMA Emulation Control Register 9829h RXGCR2[1] 982Ch RXHPCR1A[1] Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A 982Dh RXHPCR2A[1] Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A 9830h RXHPCR1B[1] Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B 9831h RXHPCR2B[1] Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B 9840h TXGCR1[2] Transmit Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 1 9841h TXGCR2[2] Transmit Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 2 9848h RXGCR1[2] Receive Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 1 9849h RXGCR2[2] Receive Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 2 984Ch RXHPCR1A[2] Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A 984Dh RXHPCR2A[2] Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A 9850h RXHPCR1B[2] Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B 9851h RXHPCR2B[2] Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B 9860h TXGCR1[3] Transmit Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 1 9861h TXGCR2[3] Transmit Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 2 9868h RXGCR1[3] Receive Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 1 9869h RXGCR2[3] Receive Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 2 986Ch RXHPCR1A[3] Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A 986Dh RXHPCR2A[3] Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A 9870h RXHPCR1B[3] Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B 9871h RXHPCR2B[3] A000h DMA_SCHED_CTRL1 CDMA Scheduler Control Register 1 A001h DMA_SCHED_CTRL2 CDMA Scheduler Control Register 1 A800h + 4 × N ENTRYLSW[N] CDMA Scheduler Table Word N Registers LSW (N = 0 to 63) A801h + 4 × N ENTRYMSW[N] CDMA Scheduler Table Word N Registers MSW (N = 0 to 63) 128 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 Table 5-43. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued) CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM C000h - Reserved C001h - Reserved C008h DIVERSION1 Queue Manager Queue Diversion Register 1 C009h DIVERSION2 Queue Manager Queue Diversion Register 2 C020h FDBSC0 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 0 C021h FDBSC1 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 1 C024h FDBSC2 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 2 C025h FDBSC3 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 3 C028h FDBSC4 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION Queue Manager (QMGR) Registers C029h FDBSC5 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 5 C02Ch FDBSC6 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 6 C02Dh FDBSC7 Queue Manager Free Descriptor/Buffer Starvation Count Register 7 C080h LRAM0BASE1 Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address Register 1 C081h LRAM0BASE2 Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address Register 2 C084h LRAM0SIZE Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Size Register C085h - C088h LRAM1BASE1 Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address Register 1 C089h LRAM1BASE2 Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address Register 2 C090h PEND0 Queue Manager Queue Pending 0 C091h PEND1 Queue Manager Queue Pending 1 C094h PEND2 Queue Manager Queue Pending 2 C095h PEND3 Queue Manager Queue Pending 3 C098h PEND4 Queue Manager Queue Pending 4 C099h PEND5 Queue Manager Queue Pending 5 D000h + 16 × R QMEMRBASE1[R] Queue Manager Memory Region R Base Address Register 1 (R = 0 to 15) D001h + 16 × R QMEMRBASE2[R] Queue Manager Memory Region R Base Address Register 2 (R = 0 to 15) D004h + 16 × R QMEMRCTRL1[R] Queue Manager Memory Region R Control Register (R = 0 to 15) D005h + 16 × R QMEMRCTRL2[R] Queue Manager Memory Region R Control Register (R = 0 to 15) E000h + 16 × N CTRL1A Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1A (N = 0 to 63) E001h + 16 × N CTRL2A Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2A (N = 0 to 63) E004h + 16 × N CTRL1B Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1B (N = 0 to 63) E005h + 16 × N CTRL2B Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2B (N = 0 to 63) E008h + 16 × N CTRL1C Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1C (N = 0 to 63) E009h + 16 × N CTRL2C Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2C (N = 0 to 63) E00Ch + 16 × N CTRL1D Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1D (N = 0 to 63) E00Dh + 16 × N CTRL2D Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2D (N = 0 to 63) E800h + 16 × N QSTAT1A Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1A (N = 0 to 63) E801h + 16 × N QSTAT2A Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2A (N = 0 to 63) E804h + 16 × N QSTAT1B Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1B (N = 0 to 63) E805h + 16 × N QSTAT2B Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2B (N = 0 to 63) E808h + 16 × N QSTAT1C Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1C (N = 0 to 63) E809h + 16 × N QSTAT1C Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2C (N = 0 to 63) Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Reserved Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 129 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.16.2 USB 2.0 Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-44. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB 2.0 (see Figure 5-35) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. PARAMETER FULL SPEED 12 Mbps HIGH SPEED 480 Mbps (1) UNIT MIN MAX MIN 1 tr(D) Rise time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals (2) 4 20 0.5 ns 2 tf(D) Fall time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals (2) 4 20 0.5 ns (3) MAX 3 trfM Rise/Fall time, matching 90 111 – – 4 VCRS Output signal cross-over voltage (2) 1.3 2 – – V 7 tw(EOPT) Pulse duration, EOP transmitter (4) 160 175 – – ns 8 tw(EOPR) Pulse duration, EOP receiver (4) 9 t(DRATE) Data Rate 10 ZDRV Driver Output Resistance 40.5 11 ZINP Receiver Input Impedance 100k (1) (2) (3) (4) 82 – 12 49.5 % ns 480 Mb/s 40.5 49.5 Ω - - Ω For more detailed information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Revision 2.0, Chapter 7. Full Speed and High Speed CL = 50 pF tRFM = (tr/tf) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.] Must accept as valid EOP USB_DM VCRS USB_DP tper - tjr 90% VOH 10% VOL tr tf Figure 5-35. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing 130 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.17 General-Purpose Timers The device has three 32-bit software programmable Timers. Each timer can be used as a generalpurpose (GP) timer. Timer2 can be configured as either a GP or a Watchdog (WD) or both. Generalpurpose timers are typically used to provide interrupts to the CPU to schedule periodic tasks or a delayed task. A watchdog timer is used to reset the CPU in case it gets into an infinite loop. The GP timers are 32bit timers with a 13-bit prescaler that can divide the CPU clock and uses this scaled value as a reference clock. These timers can be used to generate periodic interrupts. The Watchdog Timer is a 16-bit counter with a 16-bit prescaler used to provide a recovery mechanism for the device in the event of a fault condition, such as a non-exiting code loop. The device Timers support the following: • 32-bit Programmable Countdown Timer • 13-bit Prescaler Divider • Timer Modes: – 32-bit General-Purpose Timer – 32-bit Watchdog Timer (Timer2 only) • Auto Reload Option • Generates Single Interrupt to CPU (The interrupt is individually latched to determine which timer triggered the interrupt.) • Generates Active Low Pulse to the Hardware Reset (Watchdog only) • Interrupt can be used for DMA Event 5.17.1 Timers Peripheral Register Descriptions Table 5-45 through Table 5-48 show the Timer and Watchdog registers. Table 5-45. Watchdog Timer Registers (Timer2 only) CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM 1880h WDKCKLK 1882h WDKICK Watchdog Kick Register 1884h WDSVLR Watchdog Start Value Lock Register 1886h WDSVR Watchdog Start Value Register 1888h WDENLOK Watchdog Enable Lock Register 188Ah WDEN 188Ch WDPSLR 188Eh WDPS REGISTER DESCRIPTION Watchdog Kick Lock Register Watchdog Enable Register Watchdog Prescale Lock Register Watchdog Prescale Register Table 5-46. General-Purpose Timer 0 Registers CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM REGISTER DESCRIPTION 1810h TCR Timer 0 Control Register 1812h TIMPRD1 Timer 0 Period Register 1 1813h TIMPRD2 Timer 0 Period Register 2 1814h TIMCNT1 Timer 0 Counter Register 1 1815h TIMCNT2 Timer 0 Counter Register 2 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 131 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-47. General-Purpose Timer 1 Registers CPU WORD ADDRESS ACRONYM REGISTER DESCRIPTION 1850h TCR Timer 1 Control Register 1852h TIMPRD1 Timer 1 Period Register 1 1853h TIMPRD2 Timer 1 Period Register 2 1854h TIMCNT1 Timer 1 Counter Register 1 1855h TIMCNT2 Timer 1 Counter Register 2 Table 5-48. General-Purpose Timer 2 Registers CPU WORD ADDRESS 132 ACRONYM REGISTER DESCRIPTION 1890h TCR Timer 2 Control Register 1892h TIMPRD1 Timer 2 Period Register 1 1893h TIMPRD2 Timer 2 Period Register 2 1894h TIMCNT1 Timer 2 Counter Register 1 1895h TIMCNT2 Timer 2 Counter Register 2 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.18 General-Purpose Input/Output The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs. When configured as an output, you can write to an internal register to control the state driven on the output pin. When configured as an input, you can detect the state of the input by reading the state of the internal register. The GPIO can also be used to send interrupts to the CPU. The GPIO peripheral supports the following: • Up to 26 GPIOs plus 1 general-purpose output (XF) • The 26 GPIO pins have internal pulldowns (IPDs) which can be individually disabled • The 26 GPIOs can be configured to generate edge detected interrupts to the CPU on either the rising or falling edge The device GPIO pin functions are multiplexed with various other signals. For more detailed information on what signals are multiplexed with the GPIO and how to configure them, see Section 2.5, Terminal Functions and Section 3, Device Configuration of this document. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 133 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.18.1 www.ti.com General-Purpose Input/Output Peripheral Register Descriptions The external parallel port interface includes a 16-bit general purpose I/O that can be individually programmed as input or output with interrupt capability. Control of the general purpose I/O is maintained through a set of I/O memory-mapped registers shown in Table 5-49. Table 5-49. GPIO Registers HEX ADDRESS RANGE ACRONYM 1C06h IODIR1 GPIO Direction Register 1 1C07h IODIR2 GPIO Direction Register 2 1C08h IOINDATA1 GPIO Data In Register 1 1C09h IOINDATA2 GPIO Data In Register 2 1C0Ah IODATAOUT1 GPIO Data Out Register 1 1C0Bh IODATAOUT2 GPIO Data Out Register 2 1C0Ch IOINTEDG1 GPIO Interrupt Edge Trigger Enable Register 1 1C0Dh IOINTEDG2 GPIO Interrupt Edge Trigger Enable Register 2 1C0Eh IOINTEN1 GPIO Interrupt Enable Register 1 1C0Fh IOINTEN2 GPIO Interrupt Enable Register 2 1C10h IOINTFLG1 GPIO Interrupt Flag Register 1 1C11h IOINTFLG2 GPIO Interrupt Flag Register 2 134 REGISTER NAME Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.18.2 GPIO Peripheral Input/Output Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-50. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs (1) (see Figure 5-36) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. MIN 1 tw(ACTIVE) 2 (1) (2) tw(INACTIVE) Pulse duration, GPIO input/external interrupt pulse active Pulse duration, GPIO input/external interrupt pulse inactive UNIT MAX 2C (1) (2) ns (1) (2) ns C The pulse width given is sufficient to get latched into the GPIO_IFR register and to generate an interrupt. However, if a user wants to have the device recognize the GPIO changes through software polling of the GPIO Data In (GPIO_DIN) register, the GPIO duration must be extended to allow the device enough time to access the GPIO register through the internal bus. C = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when running parts at 100 MHz, use C = 10 ns. Table 5-51. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs (see Figure 5-36) NO. CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V PARAMETER MIN (1) (2) UNIT MAX 3 tw(GPOH) Pulse duration, GP[x] output high 3C (1) (2) ns 4 tw(GPOL) Pulse duration, GP[x] output low 3C (1) (2) ns This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity. C = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when running parts at 100 MHz, use C = 10 ns. 2 GP[x] Input (With IOINTEDGy = 0) 1 2 GP[x] Input (With IOINTEDGy = 1) 1 4 3 GP[x] Output Figure 5-36. GPIO Port Timing Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 135 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com 5.18.3 GPIO Peripheral Input Latency Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-52. Timing Requirements for GPIO Input Latency (1) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. MIN 1 (1) 136 tL(GPI) Latency, GP[x] input UNIT MAX Polling GPIO_DIN register 5 cyc Polling GPIO_IFR register 7 cyc Interrupt Detection 8 cyc The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt. However, if a user wants to have the device recognize the GP[x] input changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GP[x] input duration must be extended to allow device enough time to access the GPIO register through the internal bus. Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 5.19 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG The JTAG interface is used for Boundary-Scan testing and emulation of the device. TRST should only to be deasserted when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or exercise the device's boundary scan functionality. The device includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to ensure that TRST will always be asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic will always be properly initialized. It is also recommended that an external pulldown be added to ensure proper device operation when an emulation or boundary scan JTAG controller is not connected to the JTAG pins. JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST. When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to initialize the device after powerup and externally drive TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations. The device will not operate properly if TRST is not asserted low during powerup. 5.19.1 JTAG ID (JTAGID) Register Descriptions Table 5-53. JTAG ID Register HEX ADDRESS RANGE N/A ACRONYM JTAGID REGISTER NAME JTAG Identification Register COMMENTS Read-only. Provides 32-bit JTAG ID of the device. The JTAG ID register is a read-only register that identifies to the customer the JTAG/Device ID. The register hex value for the device is: 0x01B8F E02F. For the actual register bit names and their associated bit field descriptions, see Figure 5-37 and Table 5-54. 31-28 27-12 11-1 0 VARIANT (4-Bit) PART NUMBER (16-Bit) MANUFACTURER (11-Bit) LSB R-0001 R-1011 1000 1111 1110 R-0000 0010 111 R-1 LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value at reset Figure 5-37. JTAG ID Register Description - C5514 Register Value - 0x01B8F E02F Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 137 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Table 5-54. JTAG ID Register Selection Bit Descriptions BIT NAME 31:28 VARIANT DESCRIPTION 27:12 PART NUMBER 11:1 MANUFACTURER 0 LSB Variant (4-Bit) value: 0001. Part Number (16-Bit) value: 1011 1000 1111 1110. Manufacturer (11-Bit) value: 0000 0010 111. LSB. This bit is read as a "1". 5.19.2 JTAG Test_port Electrical Data/Timing Table 5-55. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 5-38) CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V NO. MIN UNIT MAX 2 tc(TCK) Cycle time, TCK 60 ns 3 tw(TCKH) Pulse duration, TCK high 24 ns 4 tw(TCKL) Pulse duration, TCK low 24 ns 5 tsu(TDIV-TCKH) Setup time, TDI valid before TCK high 10 ns 6 tsu(TMSV-TCKH) Setup time, TMS valid before TCK high 6 ns 7 th(TCKH-TDIV) Hold time, TDI valid after TCK high 5 ns 8 th(TCKH-TDIV) Hold time, TMS valid after TCK high 4 ns Table 5-56. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 5-38) NO. CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3 V PARAMETER MIN 1 td(TCKL-TDOV) Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid UNIT MAX 30.5 ns 2 3 4 TCK 1 1 TDO 7 5 TDI 8 6 TMS Figure 5-38. JTAG Test-Port Timing 138 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 6 Device and Documentation Support 6.1 6.1.1 Device Support Development Support TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C55x DSP platform, including tools to evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully integrate and debug software and hardware modules. The tool's support documentation is electronically available within the Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE). The following products support development of TMS320C55x fixed-point DSP-based applications: Software Development Tools: Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE): Version 3.3 or later C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS™ Version 5.33 or later), which provides the basic run-time target software needed to support any DSP application. Hardware Development Tools: Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C55x DSP platform, visit the Texas Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor. 6.1.2 Device and Development-Support Tool Nomenclature To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all DSP devices and support tools. Each DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS (e.g.,TMS320C5514AZCHA12). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS/TMDS). Device development evolutionary flow: TMX Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical specifications. TMP Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed quality and reliability verification. TMS Fully-qualified production device. Support tool development evolutionary flow: TMDX Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification testing. TMDS Fully qualified development-support product. TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer: "Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes." TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies. Device and Documentation Support Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 139 TMS320C5514 SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 www.ti.com Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used. TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the package type (for example, ZCH), and the temperature range (for example, "Blank" is the commercial temperature range). Figure 6-1 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any DSP platform member. TMS 320 C 5515 A ZCH A 12 PREFIX TMX = Experimental device TMS = Qualified device DEVICE MAXIMUM OPERATING FREQUENCY 10 = 60 MHz at 1.05 V, 100 MHz at 1.3 V 12 = 75 MHz at 1.05 V, 120 MHz at 1.3 V DEVICE FAMILY 320 = TMS320™ DSP family TEMPERATURE RANGE Blank = –10° C to 70° C, Commercial Temperature A = –40° C to 85° C, Industrial Temperature TECHNOLOGY C = Dual-supply CMOS DEVICE C55x™ DSP: 5515 5514 A. PACKAGE TYPE ZCH = 196-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-Free soldered balls [Green] SILICON REVISION Revision 2.0 For actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the TI website (http://www.ti.com) Figure 6-1. Device Nomenclature 6.2 Community Resources The following links connect to TI community resources. Linked contents are provided "AS IS" by the respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do not necessarily reflect TI's views; see TI's Terms of Use. TI E2E Community TI's Engineer-to-Engineer (E2E) Community. Created to foster collaboration among engineers. At e2e.ti.com, you can ask questions, share knowledge, explore ideas and help solve problems with fellow engineers. TI Embedded Processors Wiki Texas Instruments Embedded Processors Wiki. Established to help developers get started with Embedded Processors from Texas Instruments and to foster innovation and growth of general knowledge about the hardware and software surrounding these devices. 140 Device and Documentation Support Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 TMS320C5514 www.ti.com SPRS646G – AUGUST 2010 – REVISED OCTOBER 2013 7 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information The following table shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA–ZCH mechanical package. 7.1 Thermal Data for ZCH Table 7-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [ZCH] °C/W (1) AIR FLOW (m/s) (2) 1S0P 6.74 N/A 1S0P 14.5 N/A 2S2P 13.8 1S0P 57.0 2S2P 33.4 NO. 1 RΘJC 2 RΘJB 3 RΘJA Junction-to-case Junction-to-board Junction-to-free air 4 0.00 0.50 5 RΘJMA 6 1.00 Junction-to-moving air 2.00 7 3.00 8 0.09 9 0.00 0.50 10 PsiJT Junction-to-package top 1.00 11 2.00 12 3.00 13 13.7 14 15 0.00 0.50 PsiJB Junction-to-board 1.00 16 2.00 17 3.00 (1) (2) 7.2 These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards – EIA/JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air) and JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages. m/s = meters per second Packaging Information The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current data available for the designated device. This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document. Copyright © 2010–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information Submit Documentation Feedback Product Folder Links: TMS320C5514 141 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 7-Oct-2021 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Pins Package Drawing Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead finish/ Ball material MSL Peak Temp Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (3) (4/5) (6) TMS320C5514AZCH10 ACTIVE NFBGA ZCH 196 184 RoHS & Green SNAGCU Level-3-260C-168 HR 0 to 0 14AZCH10 TMS320C5514AZCH12 ACTIVE NFBGA ZCH 196 184 RoHS & Green SNAGCU Level-3-260C-168 HR 0 to 0 14AZCH12 TMS320C5514AZCHA12 ACTIVE NFBGA ZCH 196 184 RoHS & Green Call TI Level-3-260C-168 HR -40 to 85 14AZCHA12 (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. (2) RoHS: TI defines "RoHS" to mean semiconductor products that are compliant with the current EU RoHS requirements for all 10 RoHS substances, including the requirement that RoHS substance do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, "RoHS" products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. TI may reference these types of products as "Pb-Free". RoHS Exempt: TI defines "RoHS Exempt" to mean products that contain lead but are compliant with EU RoHS pursuant to a specific EU RoHS exemption. Green: TI defines "Green" to mean the content of Chlorine (Cl) and Bromine (Br) based flame retardants meet JS709B low halogen requirements of